updated for version 7.0e

Contents

@@ -9,10 +9,10 @@ Vim		Vi IMproved.  A clone of the UNIX text editor Vi.  Very useful
 		messages, shows current file name in window title, on-line
 		help, rectangular cut/paste, etc., etc., etc...
 
-		Version 7.0aa.  Also runs under UNIX, MSDOS and other systems.
-		vim70aart.tgz  contains the documentation and syntax files.
-		vim70aabin.tgz contains the binaries.
-		vim70aasrc.tgz contains the sources.
+		Version 7.0e.  Also runs under UNIX, MSDOS and other systems.
+		vim70ert.tgz  contains the documentation and syntax files.
+		vim70ebin.tgz contains the binaries.
+		vim70esrc.tgz contains the sources.
 		Author: Bram Moolenaar et al.
 
 

Filelist

@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/gui_beval.c \
 		src/gui_beval.h \
 		src/hardcopy.c \
-		src/hashtable.c \
+		src/hashtab.c \
 		src/keymap.h \
 		src/macros.h \
 		src/main.c \
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/ops.c \
 		src/option.c \
 		src/option.h \
-		src/popupmenu.c \
+		src/popupmnu.c \
 		src/quickfix.c \
 		src/regexp.c \
 		src/regexp.h \
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/gui.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_beval.pro \
 		src/proto/hardcopy.pro \
-		src/proto/hashtable.pro \
+		src/proto/hashtab.pro \
 		src/proto/main.pro \
 		src/proto/mark.pro \
 		src/proto/mbyte.pro \
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/normal.pro \
 		src/proto/ops.pro \
 		src/proto/option.pro \
-		src/proto/popupmenu.pro \
+		src/proto/popupmnu.pro \
 		src/proto/quickfix.pro \
 		src/proto/regexp.pro \
 		src/proto/screen.pro \
@@ -248,6 +248,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/Make_w16.mak \
 		src/bigvim.bat \
+		src/msvcsetup.bat \
 		src/dimm.idl \
 		src/dlldata.c \
 		src/dosinst.c \
@@ -285,6 +286,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/uninstal.c \
 		src/vim.def \
 		src/vim.rc \
+		src/vimio.h \
 		src/gvim.exe.mnf \
 		src/vim16.def \
 		src/vim16.rc \
@@ -331,7 +333,8 @@ SRC_DOS_BIN =	\
 		src/vim.tlb \
 		src/vimtbar.lib \
 		src/vimtbar.dll \
-		nsis/icons \
+		nsis/icons/*.bmp \
+		nsis/icons/*.ico \
 
 # source files for Amiga, DOS, etc. (also in the extra archive)
 SRC_AMI_DOS =	\
@@ -358,7 +361,7 @@ SRC_MAC =	\
 		src/INSTALLmac.txt \
 		src/dehqx.py \
 		src/gui_mac.c \
-		src/gui_mac.icns \
+		src/os_mac_rsrc/*.icns \
 		src/os_mac.h \
 		src/os_mac.rsr.hqx \
 		src/os_mac_conv.c \
@@ -496,11 +499,13 @@ RT_SCRIPTS =	\
 		runtime/filetype.vim \
 		runtime/scripts.vim \
 		runtime/menu.vim \
+		runtime/macmap.vim \
 		runtime/delmenu.vim \
 		runtime/synmenu.vim \
 		runtime/makemenu.vim \
 		runtime/autoload/*.vim \
 		runtime/autoload/README.txt \
+		runtime/autoload/xml/*.vim \
 		runtime/colors/*.vim \
 		runtime/colors/README.txt \
 		runtime/compiler/*.vim \
@@ -517,7 +522,6 @@ RT_SCRIPTS =	\
 # Unix runtime
 RT_UNIX =	\
 		README_unix.txt \
-		runtime/KVim.desktop \
 		runtime/hi16-action-make.png \
 		runtime/hi22-action-make.png \
 		runtime/vim16x16.png \
@@ -654,6 +658,8 @@ LANG_GEN = \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-it.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-it.UTF-8.1 \
+		runtime/doc/*-pl.1 \
+		runtime/doc/*-pl.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-ru.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-ru.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/lang/README.txt \
@@ -675,6 +681,7 @@ LANG_GEN = \
 		runtime/spell/??/main.aap \
 		runtime/spell/yi/README.txt \
 		runtime/spell/main.aap \
+		runtime/spell/cleanadd.vim \
 		runtime/spell/*.vim \
 		runtime/spell/fixdup \
 

Makefile

@@ -69,15 +69,15 @@ all install uninstall tools config configure proto depend lint tags types test t
 #    Before creating an archive first delete all backup files, *.orig, etc.
 
 MAJOR = 7
-MINOR = 0aa
+MINOR = 0e
 
 # Uncomment this line if the Win32s version is to be included.
-#DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
+DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
 
 # CHECKLIST for creating a new version:
 #
 # - Update Vim version number.  For a test version in: src/version.h, Contents,
-#   MAJOR/MINOR above, VIMRTDIR and VERSION in src/Makefile, README*.txt,
+#   MAJOR/MINOR above, VIMMAJOR and VIMMINOR in src/Makefile, README*.txt,
 #   runtime/doc/*.txt and nsis/gvim.nsi. Other things in README_os2.txt.  For a
 #   minor/major version: src/GvimExt/GvimExt.reg, src/vim.def, src/vim16.def.
 # - Correct included_patches[] in src/version.c.
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ MINOR = 0aa
 # - Check for missing entries in runtime/makemenu.vim (with checkmenu script).
 # - Check for missing options in runtime/optwin.vim et al. (with check.vim).
 # - Do "make menu" to update the runtime/synmenu.vim file.
-# - Add remarks for changes to runtime/doc/version6.txt.
+# - Add remarks for changes to runtime/doc/version7.txt.
 # - In runtime/doc run "make" and "make html" to check for errors.
 # - Check if src/Makefile and src/feature.h don't contain any personal
 #   preferences or the GTK, Perl, etc. mentioned above.
@@ -128,21 +128,24 @@ MINOR = 0aa
 # - Rename the executables to "vimd32.exe", "xxdd32.exe", "installd32.exe" and
 #   "uninstald32.exe".
 # Win32 console version:
-# - Set environment for Visual C++ 5.0: "vcvars32"
+# - Set environment for Visual C++ Toolkit 2003: "msvcsetup.bat"
 # - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak"
 # - "rm testdir/*.out", "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak test" and check the output.
 # - Rename the executables to "vimw32.exe", "xxdw32.exe".
+# - Rename ObjC/vim.pdb to vimw32.pdb.
 # - When building the Win32s version later, delete vimrun.exe, install.exe and
 #   uninstal.exe.  Otherwise rename executables to installw32.exe and
 #   uninstalw32.exe.
 # Win32 GUI version:
 # - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes.
 # - move "gvim.exe" to here (otherwise the OLE version will overwrite it).
+# - Move ObjG/gvim.pdb to here.
 # - Delete vimrun.exe, install.exe and uninstall.exe.
 # - Copy "GvimExt/gvimext.dll" to here.
 # Win32 GUI version with OLE, PERL, TCL, PYTHON and dynamic IME:
 # - Run src/bigvim.bat ("nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes OLE=yes IME=yes ...)
 # - Rename "gvim.exe" to "gvim_ole.exe".
+# - Rename ObjGOLYTR/gvim.pdb to "gvim_ole.pdb".
 # - Delete install.exe and uninstall.exe.
 # - If building the Win32s version delete vimrun.exe.
 # Win32s GUI version:
@@ -156,6 +159,7 @@ MINOR = 0aa
 # - The produced uninstalw32.exe and vimrun.exe are used.
 # Create the archives:
 # - Copy all the "*.exe" files to where this Makefile is.
+# - Copy all the "*.pdb" files to where this Makefile is.
 # - "make dosbin".
 # - Run make on Unix to update the ".mo" files.
 # - "make doslang".
@@ -165,6 +169,7 @@ MINOR = 0aa
 #   uninstalw32.exe and xxdw32.exe have been build as mentioned above.
 # - put gvimext.dll in src/GvimExt and VisVim.dll in src/VisVim (get them
 #   from a binary archive or build them)
+#   Note: VisVim needs to be build with MSVC 5, newer versions don't work.
 # - make sure there is a diff.exe two levels up
 # - go to ../nsis and do "makensis gvim.nsi".
 # - Copy gvim##.exe to the dist directory.
@@ -430,6 +435,7 @@ dosbin_gvim: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	cp uninstalw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/uninstal.exe
 	cp gvimext.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvimext.dll
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z gvim$(VERSION).zip vim <$(COMMENT_GVIM)
+	cp gvim.pdb dist/gvim$(VERSION).pdb
 
 # make Win32 console
 dosbin_w32: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_W32)
@@ -446,6 +452,7 @@ dosbin_w32: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_W32)
 	cp installw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/install.exe
 	cp uninstalw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/uninstal.exe
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z vim$(VERSION)w32.zip vim <$(COMMENT_W32)
+	cp vimw32.pdb dist/vim$(VERSION)w32.pdb
 
 # make 32bit DOS
 dosbin_d32: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_D32)
@@ -500,6 +507,7 @@ dosbin_ole: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_OLE)
 	cp src/VisVim/VisVim.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/VisVim.dll
 	cp src/VisVim/README_VisVim.txt dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z gvim$(VERSION)ole.zip vim <$(COMMENT_OLE)
+	cp gvim_ole.pdb dist/gvim$(VERSION)ole.pdb
 
 # make Win32s gvim
 dosbin_s: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_W32S)

README.txt

@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
-README.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 
 WHAT IS VIM
 
 Vim is an almost compatible version of the UNIX editor Vi.  Many new features
 have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line history,
-on-line help, filename completion, block operations, etc.  There is also a
-Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See "runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt" for
-differences with Vi.
+on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations, etc.
+There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See
+"runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt" for differences with Vi.
 
 This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain ASCII files.
 All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
@@ -56,15 +56,16 @@ distribute it.
 
 SPONSORING
 
-Fixing bugs and adding new features takes a lot of effort.  For a few years
-Bram has attempted to do this next to a full-time job.  During that time the
-todo list kept getting longer and longer.
+Fixing bugs and adding new features takes a lot of time and effort.  To show
+your appreciation for the work and motivate Bram and others to continue
+working on Vim please send a donation.
 
-In order for Bram to support Vim properly he needs your help.  Through your
-donations Bram will be able to have a part-time job and spend more time on
-fixing bugs and adding new features.
+Since Bram is back to a paid job the money will now be used to help children
+in Uganda.  See runtime/doc/uganda.txt.  But at the same time donations
+increase Bram's motivation to keep working on Vim!
 
 For the most recent information about sponsoring look on the Vim web site:
+
 	http://www.vim.org/sponsor/
 
 
@@ -132,6 +133,9 @@ MAIN AUTHOR
 Send any other comments, patches, pizza and suggestions to:
 
 	Bram Moolenaar		E-mail:	Bram@vim.org
-	Clematisstraat 30
-	5925 BE  Venlo		Tel: +31 77 387 2340
-	The Netherlands		Fax/voice-mail: +31 20 773 8272
+	Molenstraat 2
+	2161 HP  Lisse
+	The Netherlands
+
+This is the address of my parents, they will forward mail and eat the pizza.
+My actual address will change a couple of times in 2006.

README_ami.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_ami.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_ami.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on Amiga systems.
 See README.txt for general information about Vim.

README_amibin.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_amibin.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_amibin.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_ami.txt" for installation instructions for the Amiga.

README_amisrc.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_amisrc.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_amisrc.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_ami.txt" for installation instructions for the Amiga.

README_bindos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_bindos.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_bindos.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_dos.txt" for installation instructions for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.

README_dos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_dos.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_dos.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on MS-DOS and MS-Windows systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.

README_extra.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_extra.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_extra.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 The extra archive of Vim is to be used in combination with the source archive
 (vim-6.0-src.tar.gz).  The extra archive is useless without it.

README_lang.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_lang.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_lang.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file contains files for non-English languages:
 - Translated messages.

README_mac.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_mac.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_mac.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on Macintosh systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.

README_ole.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_ole.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_ole.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This archive contains gvim.exe with OLE interface and VisVim.
 This version of gvim.exe can also load a number of interface dynamically (you

README_os2.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_os2.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_os2.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on OS/2 systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.

README_os390.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_os_390.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_os_390.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 Welcome to the OS/390 Unix port of VIM.
 

README_src.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_src.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_src.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 The source archive contains the files needed to compile Vim on Unix systems.
 It is packed for Unix systems (NL line separator).  It is also used for other

README_srcdos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_srcdos.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_srcdos.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_dos.txt" for installation instructions for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.

README_unix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_unix.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_unix.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on Unix systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.

README_vms.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_vms.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_vms.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on VMS systems.
 See "README.txt" in the runtime archive for information about Vim.

README_w32s.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_w32s.txt for version 7.0aa of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_w32s.txt for version 7.0e of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This archive contains the gvim.exe that was specifically compiled for use in
 the Win32s subsystem in MS-Windows 3.1 and 3.11.

nsis/gvim.nsi

@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 !define HAVE_NLS
 
 !define VER_MAJOR 7
-!define VER_MINOR 0aa
+!define VER_MINOR 0e
 
 # ----------- No configurable settings below this line -----------
 
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Function .onInit
   # $2 - holds the names to create batch files for
   StrCpy $0 "$INSTDIR\vim${VER_MAJOR}${VER_MINOR}"
   StrCpy $1 "-register-OLE"
-  StrCpy $2 "gvim evim gview gvimdiff"
+  StrCpy $2 "gvim evim gview gvimdiff vimtutor"
 
 FunctionEnd
 
@@ -214,9 +214,21 @@ Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
 	SetOutPath $0\plugin
 	File ${VIMRT}\plugin\*.*
 
+	SetOutPath $0\autoload
+	File ${VIMRT}\autoload\*.*
+
+	SetOutPath $0\autoload\xml
+	File ${VIMRT}\autoload\xml\*.*
+
 	SetOutPath $0\syntax
 	File ${VIMRT}\syntax\*.*
 
+	SetOutPath $0\spell
+	File ${VIMRT}\spell\*.txt
+	File ${VIMRT}\spell\*.vim
+	File ${VIMRT}\spell\*.spl
+	File ${VIMRT}\spell\*.sug
+
 	SetOutPath $0\tools
 	File ${VIMRT}\tools\*.*
 

runtime/KVim.desktop

@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-# KDE Config File
-[Desktop Entry]
-Type=Application
-Exec=kvim -f %F
-Icon=kvim
-MiniIcon=kvim
-DocPath=kvim/index.html
-Comment=
-Comment[xx]=xx
-Terminal=0
-Name=KVim
-Name[eo]=VIM-fasado
-Name[sv]=Kvim
-Name[xx]=xx
-Comment=Text Editor
-Comment[ar]=محرر نصوص
-Comment[bg]=Текст Редактор
-Comment[de]=Texteditor
-Comment[el]=Διορθωτής Κειμένου
-Comment[eo]=Tekstredaktilo
-Comment[et]=Tekstiredaktor
-Comment[eu]=Testu Editorea
-Comment[fi]=Tekstieditori
-Comment[he]=עורך טקסט
-Comment[is]=Textaritill
-Comment[ja]=テキストエディタ
-Comment[lt]=Teksto redaktorius
-Comment[mt]=Editur tat-test
-Comment[pt_BR]=Editor de Texto
-Comment[ro]=Editor de text
-Comment[ru]=редактор
-Comment[sk]=Textový editor
-Comment[sl]=Urejevalnik besedil
-Comment[ta]=¯¨Ã ¦¾¡ÌôÀ¡Ç÷
-Comment[tr]=Metin Düzenleyici
-Comment[uk]=Редактор текстів
-Comment[vi]=Trình soạn văn bản
-Comment[xx]=xx
-Comment[zh_CN]=文本编辑器
-Comment[zh_TW]=文字編輯器
-MimeType=application/mathml+xml;application/xhtml+xml;application/x-perl;application/x-python;application/x-shellscript;audio/x-mpegurl;audio/x-scpls;image/svg+xml;message/news;message/rfc822;text/calendar;text/css;text/english;text/html;text/mrml;text/plain;text/rdf;text/rss;text/rtf;text/sgml;text/vnd.wap.wml;text/x-adasrc;text/x-bibtex;text/x-chdr;text/x-c++hdr;text/x-csrc;text/x-c++src;text/x-csv;text/x-diff;text/x-java;text/x-katefilelist;text/x-latex;text/x-log;text/x-lyx;text/x-makefile;text/xmcd;text/xml;text/x-moc;text/x-mswinurl;text/x-objcsrc;text/x-pascal;text/x-perl;text/x-python;text/x-tcl;text/x-tex;text/x-vcalendar;text/x-vcard;text/x-xslfo;text/x-xslt
-X-KDE-StartupNotify=true
-X-KDE-AuthorizeAction=shell access
-

runtime/autoload/README.txt

@@ -4,12 +4,19 @@ These are functions used by plugins and for general use.  They will be loaded
 automatically when the function is invoked.  See ":help autoload".
 
 gzip.vim	for editing compressed files
-netrw.vim	browsing (remote) directories and editing remote files
+netrw*.vim	browsing (remote) directories and editing remote files
 tar.vim		browsing tar files
 zip.vim		browsing zip files
+paste.vim	common code for mswin.vim, menu.vim and macmap.vim
+spellfile.vim	downloading of a missing spell file
 
-Occult completion files:
+Omni completion files:
 ccomplete.vim		C
 csscomplete.vim		HTML / CSS
 htmlcomplete.vim	HTML
-
+javascriptcomplete.vim  Javascript
+phpcomplete.vim		PHP
+pythoncomplete.vim	Python
+rubycomplete.vim	Ruby
+syntaxcomplete.vim	from syntax highlighting
+xmlcomplete.vim		XML (uses files in the xml directory)

runtime/autoload/ccomplete.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2006 Feb 10
+" Last Change:	2006 Mar 24
 
 
 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
@@ -64,6 +64,9 @@ function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     return []
   endif
 
+  " init cache for vimgrep to empty
+  let s:grepCache = {}
+
   " Split item in words, keep empty word after "." or "->".
   " "aa" -> ['aa'], "aa." -> ['aa', ''], "aa.bb" -> ['aa', 'bb'], etc.
   " We can't use split, because we need to skip nested [...].
@@ -120,10 +123,11 @@ function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
       " Completing one word and it's a local variable: May add '[', '.' or
       " '->'.
       let match = items[0]
-      if match(line, match . '\s*\[') > 0
+      let kind = 'v'
+      if match(line, '\<' . match . '\s*\[') > 0
 	let match .= '['
       else
-	let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), [''], 0)
+	let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), [''], 0, 1)
 	if len(res) > 0
 	  " There are members, thus add "." or "->".
 	  if match(line, '\*[ \t(]*' . match . '\>') > 0
@@ -133,27 +137,40 @@ function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
 	  endif
 	endif
       endif
-      let res = [{'match': match, 'tagline' : ''}]
+      let res = [{'match': match, 'tagline' : '', 'kind' : kind, 'info' : line}]
     else
       " Completing "var.", "var.something", etc.
-      let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), items[1:], 0)
+      let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), items[1:], 0, 1)
     endif
   endif
 
   if len(items) == 1
     " Only one part, no "." or "->": complete from tags file.
-    call extend(res, map(taglist('^' . base), 's:Tag2item(v:val)'))
+    let tags = taglist('^' . base)
+
+    " Remove members, these can't appear without something in front.
+    call filter(tags, 'has_key(v:val, "kind") ? v:val["kind"] != "m" : 1')
+
+    " Remove static matches in other files.
+    call filter(tags, '!has_key(v:val, "static") || !v:val["static"] || bufnr("%") == bufnr(v:val["filename"])')
+
+    call extend(res, map(tags, 's:Tag2item(v:val)'))
   endif
 
   if len(res) == 0
     " Find the variable in the tags file(s)
     let diclist = taglist('^' . items[0] . '$')
 
+    " Remove members, these can't appear without something in front.
+    call filter(diclist, 'has_key(v:val, "kind") ? v:val["kind"] != "m" : 1')
+
     let res = []
     for i in range(len(diclist))
-      " New ctags has the "typename" field.
+      " New ctags has the "typeref" field.  Patched version has "typename".
       if has_key(diclist[i], 'typename')
-	call extend(res, s:StructMembers(diclist[i]['typename'], items[1:]))
+	call extend(res, s:StructMembers(diclist[i]['typename'], items[1:], 1))
+      elseif has_key(diclist[i], 'typeref')
+	call extend(res, s:StructMembers(diclist[i]['typeref'], items[1:], 1))
       endif
 
       " For a variable use the command, which must be a search pattern that
@@ -162,7 +179,7 @@ function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
 	let line = diclist[i]['cmd']
 	if line[0] == '/' && line[1] == '^'
 	  let col = match(line, '\<' . items[0] . '\>')
-	  call extend(res, s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 2, col - 2), items[1:], 0))
+	  call extend(res, s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 2, col - 2), items[1:], 0, 1))
 	endif
       endif
     endfor
@@ -173,7 +190,7 @@ function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     " TODO: join previous line if it makes sense
     let line = getline('.')
     let col = col('.')
-    let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), items[1:], 0)
+    let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), items[1:], 0, 1)
   endif
 
   " If the last item(s) are [...] they need to be added to the matches.
@@ -197,7 +214,7 @@ function! s:GetAddition(line, match, memarg, bracket)
   endif
 
   " Check if the item has members.
-  if len(s:SearchMembers(a:memarg, [''])) > 0
+  if len(s:SearchMembers(a:memarg, [''], 0)) > 0
     " If there is a '*' before the name use "->".
     if match(a:line, '\*[ \t(]*' . a:match . '\>') > 0
       return '->'
@@ -213,17 +230,73 @@ endfunction
 " If it is a variable we may add "." or "->".  Don't do it for other types,
 " such as a typedef, by not including the info that s:GetAddition() uses.
 function! s:Tag2item(val)
-  let x = s:Tagcmd2extra(a:val['cmd'], a:val['name'], a:val['filename'])
+  let res = {'match': a:val['name']}
 
+  let res['extra'] = s:Tagcmd2extra(a:val['cmd'], a:val['name'], a:val['filename'])
+
+  let s = s:Dict2info(a:val)
+  if s != ''
+    let res['info'] = s
+  endif
+
+  let res['tagline'] = ''
   if has_key(a:val, "kind")
-    if a:val["kind"] == 'v'
-      return {'match': a:val['name'], 'tagline': "\t" . a:val['cmd'], 'dict': a:val, 'extra': x}
-    endif
-    if a:val["kind"] == 'f'
-      return {'match': a:val['name'] . '(', 'tagline': "", 'extra': x}
+    let kind = a:val['kind']
+    let res['kind'] = kind
+    if kind == 'v'
+      let res['tagline'] = "\t" . a:val['cmd']
+      let res['dict'] = a:val
+    elseif kind == 'f'
+      let res['match'] = a:val['name'] . '('
     endif
   endif
-  return {'match': a:val['name'], 'tagline': '', 'extra': x}
+
+  return res
+endfunction
+
+" Use all the items in dictionary for the "info" entry.
+function! s:Dict2info(dict)
+  let info = ''
+  for k in sort(keys(a:dict))
+    let info  .= k . repeat(' ', 10 - len(k))
+    if k == 'cmd'
+      let info .= substitute(matchstr(a:dict['cmd'], '/^\s*\zs.*\ze$/'), '\\\(.\)', '\1', 'g')
+    else
+      let info .= a:dict[k]
+    endif
+    let info .= "\n"
+  endfor
+  return info
+endfunc
+
+" Parse a tag line and return a dictionary with items like taglist()
+function! s:ParseTagline(line)
+  let l = split(a:line, "\t")
+  let d = {}
+  if len(l) >= 3
+    let d['name'] = l[0]
+    let d['filename'] = l[1]
+    let d['cmd'] = l[2]
+    let n = 2
+    if l[2] =~ '^/'
+      " Find end of cmd, it may contain Tabs.
+      while n < len(l) && l[n] !~ '/;"$'
+	let n += 1
+	let d['cmd'] .= "  " . l[n]
+      endwhile
+    endif
+    for i in range(n + 1, len(l) - 1)
+      if l[i] == 'file:'
+	let d['static'] = 1
+      elseif l[i] !~ ':'
+	let d['kind'] = l[i]
+      else
+	let d[matchstr(l[i], '[^:]*')] = matchstr(l[i], ':\zs.*')
+      endif
+    endfor
+  endif
+
+  return d
 endfunction
 
 " Turn a match item "val" into an item for completion.
@@ -231,25 +304,50 @@ endfunction
 " "val['tagline']" is the tagline in which the last part was found.
 function! s:Tagline2item(val, brackets)
   let line = a:val['tagline']
-  let word = a:val['match'] . a:brackets . s:GetAddition(line, a:val['match'], [a:val], a:brackets == '')
+  let add = s:GetAddition(line, a:val['match'], [a:val], a:brackets == '')
+  let res = {'word': a:val['match'] . a:brackets . add }
+
+  if has_key(a:val, 'info')
+    " Use info from Tag2item().
+    let res['info'] = a:val['info']
+  else
+    " Parse the tag line and add each part to the "info" entry.
+    let s = s:Dict2info(s:ParseTagline(line))
+    if s != ''
+      let res['info'] = s
+    endif
+  endif
+
+  if has_key(a:val, 'kind')
+    let res['kind'] = a:val['kind']
+  elseif add == '('
+    let res['kind'] = 'f'
+  else
+    let s = matchstr(line, '\t\(kind:\)\=\zs\S\ze\(\t\|$\)')
+    if s != ''
+      let res['kind'] = s
+    endif
+  endif
+
   if has_key(a:val, 'extra')
-    return {'word': word, 'menu': a:val['extra']}
+    let res['menu'] = a:val['extra']
+    return res
   endif
 
   " Isolate the command after the tag and filename.
   let s = matchstr(line, '[^\t]*\t[^\t]*\t\zs\(/^.*$/\|[^\t]*\)\ze\(;"\t\|\t\|$\)')
   if s != ''
-    return {'word': word, 'menu': s:Tagcmd2extra(s, a:val['match'], matchstr(line, '[^\t]*\t\zs[^\t]*\ze\t'))}
+    let res['menu'] = s:Tagcmd2extra(s, a:val['match'], matchstr(line, '[^\t]*\t\zs[^\t]*\ze\t'))
   endif
-  return {'word': word}
+  return res
 endfunction
 
 " Turn a command from a tag line to something that is useful in the menu
 function! s:Tagcmd2extra(cmd, name, fname)
   if a:cmd =~ '^/^'
     " The command is a search command, useful to see what it is.
-    let x = matchstr(a:cmd, '^/^\zs.*\ze$/')
-    let x = substitute(x, a:name, '@@', '')
+    let x = matchstr(a:cmd, '^/^\s*\zs.*\ze$/')
+    let x = substitute(x, '\<' . a:name . '\>', '@@', '')
     let x = substitute(x, '\\\(.\)', '\1', 'g')
     let x = x . ' - ' . a:fname
   elseif a:cmd =~ '^\d*$'
@@ -266,7 +364,7 @@ endfunction
 " Repeat this recursively for items[1], if it's there.
 " When resolving typedefs "depth" is used to avoid infinite recursion.
 " Return the list of matches.
-function! s:Nextitem(lead, items, depth)
+function! s:Nextitem(lead, items, depth, all)
 
   " Use the text up to the variable name and split it in tokens.
   let tokens = split(a:lead, '\s\+\|\<')
@@ -275,9 +373,14 @@ function! s:Nextitem(lead, items, depth)
   let res = []
   for tidx in range(len(tokens))
 
+    " Skip tokens starting with a non-ID character.
+    if tokens[tidx] !~ '^\h'
+      continue
+    endif
+
     " Recognize "struct foobar" and "union foobar".
     if (tokens[tidx] == 'struct' || tokens[tidx] == 'union') && tidx + 1 < len(tokens)
-      let res = s:StructMembers(tokens[tidx] . ':' . tokens[tidx + 1], a:items)
+      let res = s:StructMembers(tokens[tidx] . ':' . tokens[tidx + 1], a:items, a:all)
       break
     endif
 
@@ -289,20 +392,31 @@ function! s:Nextitem(lead, items, depth)
     " Use the tags file to find out if this is a typedef.
     let diclist = taglist('^' . tokens[tidx] . '$')
     for tagidx in range(len(diclist))
-      " New ctags has the "typename" field.
-      if has_key(diclist[tagidx], 'typename')
-	call extend(res, s:StructMembers(diclist[tagidx]['typename'], a:items))
+      let item = diclist[tagidx]
+
+      " New ctags has the "typeref" field.  Patched version has "typename".
+      if has_key(item, 'typeref')
+	call extend(res, s:StructMembers(item['typeref'], a:items, a:all))
+	continue
+      endif
+      if has_key(item, 'typename')
+	call extend(res, s:StructMembers(item['typename'], a:items, a:all))
 	continue
       endif
 
       " Only handle typedefs here.
-      if diclist[tagidx]['kind'] != 't'
+      if item['kind'] != 't'
+	continue
+      endif
+
+      " Skip matches local to another file.
+      if has_key(item, 'static') && item['static'] && bufnr('%') != bufnr(item['filename'])
 	continue
       endif
 
       " For old ctags we recognize "typedef struct aaa" and
       " "typedef union bbb" in the tags file command.
-      let cmd = diclist[tagidx]['cmd']
+      let cmd = item['cmd']
       let ei = matchend(cmd, 'typedef\s\+')
       if ei > 1
 	let cmdtokens = split(strpart(cmd, ei), '\s\+\|\<')
@@ -317,11 +431,11 @@ function! s:Nextitem(lead, items, depth)
 	      endif
 	    endfor
 	    if name != ''
-	      call extend(res, s:StructMembers(cmdtokens[0] . ':' . name, a:items))
+	      call extend(res, s:StructMembers(cmdtokens[0] . ':' . name, a:items, a:all))
 	    endif
 	  elseif a:depth < 10
 	    " Could be "typedef other_T some_T".
-	    call extend(res, s:Nextitem(cmdtokens[0], a:items, a:depth + 1))
+	    call extend(res, s:Nextitem(cmdtokens[0], a:items, a:depth + 1, a:all))
 	  endif
 	endif
       endif
@@ -338,7 +452,9 @@ endfunction
 " Search for members of structure "typename" in tags files.
 " Return a list with resulting matches.
 " Each match is a dictionary with "match" and "tagline" entries.
-function! s:StructMembers(typename, items)
+" When "all" is non-zero find all, otherwise just return 1 if there is any
+" member.
+function! s:StructMembers(typename, items, all)
   " Todo: What about local structures?
   let fnames = join(map(tagfiles(), 'escape(v:val, " \\")'))
   if fnames == ''
@@ -347,21 +463,54 @@ function! s:StructMembers(typename, items)
 
   let typename = a:typename
   let qflist = []
-  while 1
-    exe 'silent! vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames
-    let qflist = getqflist()
-    if len(qflist) > 0 || match(typename, "::") < 0
-      break
+  let cached = 0
+  if a:all == 0
+    let n = '1'	" stop at first found match
+    if has_key(s:grepCache, a:typename)
+      let qflist = s:grepCache[a:typename]
+      let cached = 1
     endif
-    " No match for "struct:context::name", remove "context::" and try again.
-    let typename = substitute(typename, ':[^:]*::', ':', '')
-  endwhile
+  else
+    let n = ''
+  endif
+  if !cached
+    while 1
+      exe 'silent! ' . n . 'vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames
 
+      let qflist = getqflist()
+      if len(qflist) > 0 || match(typename, "::") < 0
+	break
+      endif
+      " No match for "struct:context::name", remove "context::" and try again.
+      let typename = substitute(typename, ':[^:]*::', ':', '')
+    endwhile
+
+    if a:all == 0
+      " Store the result to be able to use it again later.
+      let s:grepCache[a:typename] = qflist
+    endif
+  endif
+
+  " Put matching members in matches[].
   let matches = []
   for l in qflist
     let memb = matchstr(l['text'], '[^\t]*')
     if memb =~ '^' . a:items[0]
-      call add(matches, {'match': memb, 'tagline': l['text']})
+      " Skip matches local to another file.
+      if match(l['text'], "\tfile:") < 0 || bufnr('%') == bufnr(matchstr(l['text'], '\t\zs[^\t]*'))
+	let item = {'match': memb, 'tagline': l['text']}
+
+	" Add the kind of item.
+	let s = matchstr(l['text'], '\t\(kind:\)\=\zs\S\ze\(\t\|$\)')
+	if s != ''
+	  let item['kind'] = s
+	  if s == 'f'
+	    let item['match'] = memb . '('
+	  endif
+	endif
+
+	call add(matches, item)
+      endif
     endif
   endfor
 
@@ -380,7 +529,7 @@ function! s:StructMembers(typename, items)
 
     " More items following.  For each of the possible members find the
     " matching following members.
-    return s:SearchMembers(matches, a:items[idx :])
+    return s:SearchMembers(matches, a:items[idx :], a:all)
   endif
 
   " Failed to find anything.
@@ -388,35 +537,46 @@ function! s:StructMembers(typename, items)
 endfunction
 
 " For matching members, find matches for following items.
-function! s:SearchMembers(matches, items)
+" When "all" is non-zero find all, otherwise just return 1 if there is any
+" member.
+function! s:SearchMembers(matches, items, all)
   let res = []
   for i in range(len(a:matches))
     let typename = ''
     if has_key(a:matches[i], 'dict')
       if has_key(a:matches[i].dict, 'typename')
 	let typename = a:matches[i].dict['typename']
+      elseif has_key(a:matches[i].dict, 'typeref')
+	let typename = a:matches[i].dict['typeref']
       endif
       let line = "\t" . a:matches[i].dict['cmd']
     else
       let line = a:matches[i]['tagline']
       let e = matchend(line, '\ttypename:')
+      if e < 0
+	let e = matchend(line, '\ttyperef:')
+      endif
       if e > 0
 	" Use typename field
 	let typename = matchstr(line, '[^\t]*', e)
       endif
     endif
+
     if typename != ''
-      call extend(res, s:StructMembers(typename, a:items))
+      call extend(res, s:StructMembers(typename, a:items, a:all))
     else
       " Use the search command (the declaration itself).
       let s = match(line, '\t\zs/^')
       if s > 0
 	let e = match(line, '\<' . a:matches[i]['match'] . '\>', s)
 	if e > 0
-	  call extend(res, s:Nextitem(strpart(line, s, e - s), a:items, 0))
+	  call extend(res, s:Nextitem(strpart(line, s, e - s), a:items, 0, a:all))
 	endif
       endif
     endif
+    if a:all == 0 && len(res) > 0
+      break
+    endif
   endfor
   return res
 endfunc

runtime/autoload/gzip.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim autoload file for editing compressed files.
 " Maintainer: Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change: 2005 Jul 26
+" Last Change: 2006 Mar 31
 
 " These functions are used by the gzip plugin.
 
@@ -84,9 +84,14 @@ fun gzip#read(cmd)
     '[,']d _
   endif
   " read in the uncompressed lines "'[-1r tmp"
+  " Use ++edit if the buffer was empty, keep the 'ff' and 'fenc' options.
   setlocal nobin
   if exists(":lockmarks")
-    execute "silent lockmarks " . l . "r " . tmp
+    if empty
+      execute "silent lockmarks " . l . "r ++edit " . tmp
+    else
+      execute "silent lockmarks " . l . "r " . tmp
+    endif
   else
     execute "silent " . l . "r " . tmp
   endif

runtime/autoload/htmlcomplete.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	XHTML 1.0 Strict
 " Maintainer:	Mikolaj Machowski ( mikmach AT wp DOT pl )
-" Last Change:	2006 Feb 18
+" Last Change:	2006 Mar 25
 
 function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
   if a:findstart
@@ -87,17 +87,25 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 					let context_lines = getline(curline-i, curline)
 					let b:compl_context = join(context_lines, ' ')
 					break
-				elseif context_line =~ '>[^<]*$'
-					" Normal tag line, no need for completion at all
+				elseif context_line =~ '>[^<]*$' || i == curline
+					" We are in normal tag line, no need for completion at all
+					" OR reached first line without tag at all
 					let b:compl_context = ''
 					break
 				endif
 				let i += 1
+				" We reached first line and no tag approached
+				" Prevents endless loop
+				"if i > curline
+					"let b:compl_context = ''
+					"break
+				"endif
 			endwhile
 			" Make sure we don't have counter
 			unlet! i
 		endif
 		let b:compl_context = matchstr(b:compl_context, '.*\zs<.*')
+
 		" Return proper start for on-events. Without that beginning of
 		" completion will be badly reported
 		if b:compl_context =~? 'on[a-z]*\s*=\s*\(''[^'']*\|"[^"]*\)$'
@@ -106,6 +114,15 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 				let start -= 1
 			endwhile
 		endif
+		" If b:compl_context begins with <? we are inside of PHP code. It
+		" wasn't closed so PHP completion passed it to HTML 
+		if &filetype =~? 'php' && b:compl_context =~ '^<?'
+			let b:phpcompl = 1
+			let start = col('.') - 1
+			while start >= 0 && line[start - 1] =~ '[a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff$]'
+				let start -= 1
+			endwhile
+		endif
 	else
 		let b:compl_context = getline('.')[0:compl_begin]
 	endif
@@ -117,7 +134,8 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 	" a:base is very short - we need context
 	let context = b:compl_context
 	" Check if we should do CSS completion inside of <style> tag
-	" or JS completion inside of <script> tag
+	" or JS completion inside of <script> tag or PHP completion in case of <?
+	" tag AND &ft==php
 	if exists("b:csscompl")
 		unlet! b:csscompl
 		let context = b:compl_context
@@ -126,6 +144,10 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 	elseif exists("b:jscompl")
 		unlet! b:jscompl
 		return javascriptcomplete#CompleteJS(0, a:base)
+	elseif exists("b:phpcompl")
+		unlet! b:phpcompl
+		let context = b:compl_context
+		return phpcomplete#CompletePHP(0, a:base)
 	else
 		if len(b:compl_context) == 0 && !exists("b:entitiescompl")
 			return []
@@ -139,6 +161,7 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 
 		if !exists("g:xmldata_xhtml10s")
 			runtime! autoload/xml/xhtml10s.vim
+			"call htmlcomplete#LoadData()
 		endif
 
 	    let entities =  g:xmldata_xhtml10s['vimxmlentities']
@@ -497,6 +520,7 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 		" Load data {{{
 		if !exists("g:xmldata_xhtml10s")
 			runtime! autoload/xml/xhtml10s.vim
+			"call htmlcomplete#LoadData()
 		endif
 		" }}}
 		"
@@ -537,18 +561,26 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 	" Close tag {{{
 	let b:unaryTagsStack = "base meta link hr br param img area input col"
 	if context =~ '^\/'
-		let opentag = xmlcomplete#GetLastOpenTag("b:unaryTagsStack")
-		return [opentag.">"]
+		if context =~ '^\/.'
+			return []
+		else
+			let opentag = xmlcomplete#GetLastOpenTag("b:unaryTagsStack")
+			return [opentag.">"]
+		endif
 	endif
 	" Load data {{{
 	if !exists("g:xmldata_xhtml10s")
 		runtime! autoload/xml/xhtml10s.vim
+		"call htmlcomplete#LoadData()
 	endif
 	" }}}
 	" Tag completion {{{
 	" Deal with tag completion.
 	let opentag = xmlcomplete#GetLastOpenTag("b:unaryTagsStack")
-	if opentag == ''
+	" MM: TODO: GLOT works always the same but with some weird situation it
+	" behaves as intended in HTML but screws in PHP
+	let g:ot = opentag
+	if opentag == '' || &ft == 'php' && !has_key(g:xmldata_xhtml10s, opentag)
 		" Hack for sometimes failing GetLastOpenTag.
 		" As far as I tested fail isn't GLOT fault but problem
 		" of invalid document - not properly closed tags and other mish-mash.
@@ -560,7 +592,6 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 	endif
 	" }}}
 
-
 	for m in sort(tags)
 		if m =~ '^'.context
 			call add(res, m)
@@ -587,7 +618,6 @@ function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 	endif
 	return final_menu
 
-
 	" }}}
   endif
 endfunction

runtime/autoload/netrwFileHandlers.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " netrwFileHandlers: contains various extension-based file handlers for
 "                    netrw's browsers' x command ("eXecute launcher")
 " Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Oct 12, 2005
-" Version:	7
+" Date:		Mar 22, 2006
+" Version:	8
 " Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2005 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
@@ -22,22 +22,27 @@ if exists("g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers") || &cp
 endif
 let s:keepcpo= &cpo
 set cpo&vim
-let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v7"
+let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v8"
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#Init: {{{1
-"    This functions is here to allow a call to this function to autoload
-"    the netrwFileHandlers.vim file
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#Init()
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#Init()")
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#Init")
+" netrwFileHandlers#Invoke: {{{2
+fun! netrwFileHandlers#Invoke(exten,fname)
+"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#Invoke(exten<".a:exten."> fname<".a:fname.">)")
+
+  if a:exten != "" && exists("*s:NFH_".a:exten)
+"   call Decho("let ret= netrwFileHandlers#NFH_".a:exten.'("'.a:fname.'")')
+   exe "let ret= s:NFH_".a:exten.'("'.a:fname.'")'
+  endif
+  
+"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#Invoke 0 : ret=".ret)
+  return 0
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_html: handles html when the user hits "x" when the {{{1
+" s:NFH_html: handles html when the user hits "x" when the {{{1
 "                        cursor is atop a *.html file
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_html(pagefile)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_html(".a:pagefile.")")
+fun! s:NFH_html(pagefile)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_html(".a:pagefile.")")
 
   let page= substitute(a:pagefile,'^','file://','')
 
@@ -48,19 +53,19 @@ fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_html(pagefile)
 "   call Decho("executing !netscape ".page)
    exe "!netscape \"".page.'"'
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_html 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_html 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_html 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_html 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_htm: handles html when the user hits "x" when the {{{1
+" s:NFH_htm: handles html when the user hits "x" when the {{{1
 "                        cursor is atop a *.htm file
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_htm(pagefile)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_htm(".a:pagefile.")")
+fun! s:NFH_htm(pagefile)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_htm(".a:pagefile.")")
 
   let page= substitute(a:pagefile,'^','file://','')
 
@@ -71,18 +76,18 @@ fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_htm(pagefile)
 "   call Decho("executing !netscape ".page)
    exe "!netscape \"".page.'"'
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_htm 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_htm 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_htm 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_htm 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_jpg: {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_jpg(jpgfile)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_jpg(jpgfile<".a:jpgfile.">)")
+" s:NFH_jpg: {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_jpg(jpgfile)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_jpg(jpgfile<".a:jpgfile.">)")
 
   if executable("gimp")
    exe "silent! !gimp -s ".a:jpgfile
@@ -90,181 +95,181 @@ fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_jpg(jpgfile)
 "   call Decho("silent! !".expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT ".escape(a:jpgfile," []|'"))
    exe "!".expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT \"".a:jpgfile.'"'
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_jpg 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_jpg 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_jpg 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_jpg 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_gif: {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_gif(giffile)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_gif(giffile<".a:giffile.">)")
+" s:NFH_gif: {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_gif(giffile)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_gif(giffile<".a:giffile.">)")
 
   if executable("gimp")
    exe "silent! !gimp -s ".a:giffile
   elseif executable(expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT.EXE")
    exe "silent! !".expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT \"".a:giffile.'"'
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_gif 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_gif 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_gif 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_gif 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_png: {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_png(pngfile)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_png(pngfile<".a:pngfile.">)")
+" s:NFH_png: {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_png(pngfile)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_png(pngfile<".a:pngfile.">)")
 
   if executable("gimp")
    exe "silent! !gimp -s ".a:pngfile
   elseif executable(expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT.EXE")
    exe "silent! !".expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT \"".a:pngfile.'"'
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_png 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_png 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_png 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_png 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pnm: {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pnm(pnmfile)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pnm(pnmfile<".a:pnmfile.">)")
+" s:NFH_pnm: {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_pnm(pnmfile)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_pnm(pnmfile<".a:pnmfile.">)")
 
   if executable("gimp")
    exe "silent! !gimp -s ".a:pnmfile
   elseif executable(expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT.EXE")
    exe "silent! !".expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT \"".a:pnmfile.'"'
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pnm 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_pnm 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pnm 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_pnm 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_bmp: visualize bmp files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_bmp(bmpfile)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_bmp(bmpfile<".a:bmpfile.">)")
+" s:NFH_bmp: visualize bmp files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_bmp(bmpfile)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_bmp(bmpfile<".a:bmpfile.">)")
 
   if executable("gimp")
    exe "silent! !gimp -s ".a:bmpfile
   elseif executable(expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT.EXE")
    exe "silent! !".expand("$SystemRoot")."/SYSTEM32/MSPAINT \"".a:bmpfile.'"'
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_bmp 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_bmp 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_bmp 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_bmp 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pdf: visualize pdf files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pdf(pdf)
-"  " call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pdf(pdf<".a:pdf.">)")
+" s:NFH_pdf: visualize pdf files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_pdf(pdf)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_pdf(pdf<".a:pdf.">)")
   if executable("gs")
    exe 'silent! !gs "'.a:pdf.'"'
   else
-"   " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pdf 0")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_pdf 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_pdf 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_pdf 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_doc: visualize doc files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_doc(doc)
-"  " call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_doc(doc<".a:doc.">)")
+" s:NFH_doc: visualize doc files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_doc(doc)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_doc(doc<".a:doc.">)")
 
   if executable("oowriter")
    exe 'silent! !oowriter "'.a:doc.'"'
    redraw!
   else
-"   " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_doc 0")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_doc 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_doc 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_doc 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_sxw: visualize sxw files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_sxw(sxw)
-"  " call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_sxw(sxw<".a:sxw.">)")
+" s:NFH_sxw: visualize sxw files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_sxw(sxw)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_sxw(sxw<".a:sxw.">)")
 
   if executable("oowriter")
    exe 'silent! !oowriter "'.a:sxw.'"'
    redraw!
   else
-"   " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_sxw 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_sxw 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_sxw 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_sxw 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_xls: visualize xls files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_xls(xls)
-"  " call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_xls(xls<".a:xls.">)")
+" s:NFH_xls: visualize xls files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_xls(xls)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_xls(xls<".a:xls.">)")
 
   if executable("oocalc")
    exe 'silent! !oocalc "'.a:xls.'"'
    redraw!
   else
-"   " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_xls 0")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_xls 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  " call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_xls 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_xls 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_ps: handles PostScript files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_ps(ps)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_ps()")
+" s:NFH_ps: handles PostScript files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_ps(ps)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_ps(ps<".a:ps.">)")
   if executable("gs")
+"   call Decho("exe silent! !gs ".a:ps)
    exe "silent! !gs ".a:ps
    redraw!
   elseif executable("ghostscript")
-   exe "silent! !ghostscript ".a:ps
-   redraw!
-  elseif executable("ghostscript")
+"   call Decho("exe silent! !ghostscript ".a:ps)
    exe "silent! !ghostscript ".a:ps
    redraw!
   elseif executable("gswin32")
+"   call Decho("exe silent! !gswin32 \"".a:ps.'"')
    exe "silent! !gswin32 \"".a:ps.'"'
    redraw!
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_ps 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_ps 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_ps 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_ps 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_eps: handles encapsulated PostScript files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_eps(eps)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_ps()")
+" s:NFH_eps: handles encapsulated PostScript files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_eps(eps)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_eps()")
   if executable("gs")
    exe "silent! !gs ".a:eps
    redraw!
@@ -278,40 +283,42 @@ fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_eps(eps)
    exe "silent! !gswin32 \"".a:eps.'"'
    redraw!
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_ps 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_eps 0")
    return 0
   endif
-endfun
-
-" ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_fig: handles xfig files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_fig(fig)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_fig()")
-  if executable("xfig")
-   exe "silent! !xfig ".a:fig
-   redraw!
-  else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_fig 0")
-   return 0
-  endif
-
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_fig 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_eps 0")
   return 1
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-" netrwFileHandlers#NFH_obj: handles tgif's obj files {{{1
-fun! netrwFileHandlers#NFH_obj(obj)
-"  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_obj()")
+" s:NFH_fig: handles xfig files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_fig(fig)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_fig()")
+  if executable("xfig")
+   exe "silent! !xfig ".a:fig
+   redraw!
+  else
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_fig 0")
+   return 0
+  endif
+
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_fig 1")
+  return 1
+endfun
+
+" ---------------------------------------------------------------------
+" s:NFH_obj: handles tgif's obj files {{{1
+fun! s:NFH_obj(obj)
+"  call Dfunc("s:NFH_obj()")
   if has("unix") && executable("tgif")
    exe "silent! !tgif ".a:obj
    redraw!
   else
-"   call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_obj 0")
+"   call Dret("s:NFH_obj 0")
    return 0
   endif
 
-"  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#NFH_obj 1")
+"  call Dret("s:NFH_obj 1")
   return 1
 endfun
 

runtime/autoload/netrwSettings.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " netrwSettings.vim: makes netrw settings simpler
-" Date:		Jan 26, 2006
+" Date:		Mar 22, 2006
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <drchipNOSPAM at campbellfamily dot biz>
-" Version:	6a	ASTRO-ONLY
+" Version:	6
 " Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2005 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 if exists("g:loaded_netrwSettings") || &cp
   finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_netrwSettings  = "v6a"
+let g:loaded_netrwSettings  = "v6"
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " NetrwSettings: {{{1
@@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
    let g:netrw_ignorenetrc= 0
   endif
 
-  put ='+ --------------------------------------------'
-  put ='+ NetrwSettings:  by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.'
-  put ='+  Press ? with cursor atop any line for help  '
-  put ='+ --------------------------------------------'
+  put ='+ ---------------------------------------------'
+  put ='+  NetrwSettings:  by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.'
+  put ='+ Press <F1> with cursor atop any line for help'
+  put ='+ ---------------------------------------------'
   let s:netrw_settings_stop= line(".")
 
   put =''
@@ -96,6 +96,7 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
    put = 'let g:netrw_browsex_viewer    = (not defined)'
   endif
   put = 'let g:netrw_dirhistmax        = '.g:netrw_dirhistmax
+  put = 'let g:netrw_fastbrowse        = '.g:netrw_fastbrowse
   put = 'let g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject = '.g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject
   put = 'let g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd      = '.g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd
   put = 'let g:netrw_hide              = '.g:netrw_hide
@@ -131,7 +132,7 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
 
   set nomod
 
-  map <buffer> <silent> ? :call NetrwSettingHelp()<cr>
+  map <buffer> <silent> <F1> :call NetrwSettingHelp()<cr>
   let tmpfile= tempname()
   exe 'au BufWriteCmd	Netrw\ Settings	silent w! '.tmpfile.'|so '.tmpfile.'|call delete("'.tmpfile.'")|set nomod'
 endfun

runtime/autoload/paste.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+" Vim support file to help with paste mappings and menus
+" Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+" Last Change:	2006 Mar 09
+
+" Define the string to use for items that are present both in Edit, Popup and
+" Toolbar menu.  Also used in mswin.vim and macmap.vim.
+
+" Pasting blockwise and linewise selections is not possible in Insert and
+" Visual mode without the +virtualedit feature.  They are pasted as if they
+" were characterwise instead.  Add to that some tricks to leave the cursor in
+" the right position, also for "gi".
+if has("virtualedit")
+  let paste#paste_cmd = {'n': ":call paste#Paste()<CR>"}
+  let paste#paste_cmd['v'] = '"-c<Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n']
+  let paste#paste_cmd['i'] = '<Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n'] . 'gi'
+
+  func! paste#Paste()
+    let ove = &ve
+    set ve=all
+    normal! `^
+    if @+ != ''
+      normal! "+gP
+    endif
+    let c = col(".")
+    normal! i
+    if col(".") < c	" compensate for i<ESC> moving the cursor left
+      normal! l
+    endif
+    let &ve = ove
+  endfunc
+else
+  let paste#paste_cmd = {'n': "\"=@+.'xy'<CR>gPFx\"_2x"}
+  let paste#paste_cmd['v'] = '"-c<Esc>gix<Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n'] . '"_x'
+  let paste#paste_cmd['i'] = 'x<Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n'] . '"_s'
+endif
+
+if has("virtualedit")
+else
+endif

runtime/autoload/pythoncomplete.vim

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-"pycomplete.vim - Omni Completion for python
+"pythoncomplete.vim - Omni Completion for python
 " Maintainer: Aaron Griffin
 " Version: 0.3
 " Last Updated: 23 January 2006
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ if !has('python')
     finish
 endif
 
-function! pycomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
+function! pythoncomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     "findstart = 1 when we need to get the text length
     if a:findstart
         let line = getline('.')
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ function! pycomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     "findstart = 0 when we need to return the list of completions
     else
         execute "python get_completions('" . a:base . "')"
-        return g:pycomplete_completions
+        return g:pythoncomplete_completions
     endif
 endfunction
 
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ LOCALDEFS = \
 def dbg(level,msg):
     debug_level = 1
     try:
-        debug_level = vim.eval("g:pycomplete_debug_level")
+        debug_level = vim.eval("g:pythoncomplete_debug_level")
     except:
         pass
     if level <= debug_level: print(msg)
@@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ def get_completions(base):
         else:
             completions.append(all)
         #dbg(10,"all completions: %s" % completions)
-        vim.command("let g:pycomplete_completions = %s" % completions)
+        vim.command("let g:pythoncomplete_completions = %s" % completions)
     except:
-        vim.command("let g:pycomplete_completions = []")
+        vim.command("let g:pythoncomplete_completions = []")
         #dbg(1,"exception: %s" % sys.exc_info()[1])
     clean_up()
 
@@ -346,6 +346,6 @@ sys.path.extend(['.','..'])
 PYTHONEOF
 endfunction
 
-let g:pycomplete_debug_level = 0
+let g:pythoncomplete_debug_level = 0
 call s:DefPython()
 " vim: set et ts=4:

runtime/autoload/rubycomplete.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+" Vim completion script
+" Language:				Ruby
+" Maintainer:			Mark Guzman ( segfault AT hasno DOT info )
+" Info:					$Id$
+" URL:					http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
+" Anon CVS:				See above site
+" Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
+" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+"
+" Ruby IRB/Complete author: Keiju ISHITSUKA(keiju@ishitsuka.com)
+" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+if !has('ruby')
+    echo "Error: Required vim compiled with +ruby"
+    finish
+endif
+
+if version < 700
+    echo "Error: Required vim >= 7.0"
+    finish
+endif
+
+func! GetRubyVarType(v)
+	let stopline = 1
+	let vtp = ''
+	let pos = getpos('.')
+	let [lnum,lcol] = searchpos('^\s*#\s*@var\s*'.a:v.'\>\s\+[^ \t]\+\s*$','nb',stopline)
+	if lnum != 0 && lcol != 0
+		call setpos('.',pos)
+		let str = getline(lnum)
+		let vtp = substitute(str,'^\s*#\s*@var\s*'.a:v.'\>\s\+\([^ \t]\+\)\s*$','\1','')
+		return vtp
+	endif
+	call setpos('.',pos)
+	let [lnum,lcol] = searchpos(''.a:v.'\>\s*[+\-*/]*=\s*\([^ \t]\+.\(now\|new\|open\|get_instance\)\>\|[\[{"'']\)','nb',stopline)
+	if lnum != 0 && lcol != 0
+		let str = matchstr(getline(lnum),'=\s*\([^ \t]\+.\(now\|new\|open\|get_instance\)\>\|[\[{"'']\)',lcol)
+		let str = substitute(str,'^=\s*','','')
+		call setpos('.',pos)
+		if str == '"' || str == ''''
+			return 'String'
+		elseif str == '['
+			return 'Array'
+		elseif str == '{'
+			return 'Hash'
+		elseif strlen(str) > 4
+            let l = stridx(str,'.')
+			return str[0:l-1]
+		end
+		return ''
+	endif
+	call setpos('.',pos)
+    return ''
+endf
+
+function! rubycomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
+     "findstart = 1 when we need to get the text length
+    if a:findstart
+        let line = getline('.')
+        let idx = col('.')
+        while idx > 0
+            let idx -= 1
+            let c = line[idx-1]
+            if c =~ '\w'
+                continue
+            elseif ! c =~ '\.'
+                idx = -1
+                break
+            else
+                break
+            endif
+        endwhile
+
+        return idx
+    "findstart = 0 when we need to return the list of completions
+    else
+        execute "ruby get_completions('" . a:base . "')"
+        return g:rbcomplete_completions
+    endif
+endfunction
+
+
+function! s:DefRuby()
+ruby << RUBYEOF
+ReservedWords = [
+      "BEGIN", "END",
+      "alias", "and",
+      "begin", "break",
+      "case", "class",
+      "def", "defined", "do",
+      "else", "elsif", "end", "ensure",
+      "false", "for",
+      "if", "in",
+      "module",
+      "next", "nil", "not",
+      "or",
+      "redo", "rescue", "retry", "return",
+      "self", "super",
+      "then", "true",
+      "undef", "unless", "until",
+      "when", "while",
+      "yield",
+    ]
+
+Operators = [ "%", "&", "*", "**", "+",  "-",  "/",
+      "<", "<<", "<=", "<=>", "==", "===", "=~", ">", ">=", ">>",
+      "[]", "[]=", "^", ]
+
+def identify_type(var)
+    @buf = VIM::Buffer.current
+    enum = @buf.line_number
+    snum = (enum-10).abs
+    nums = Range.new( snum, enum )
+    regxs = '/.*(%s)\s*=(.*)/' % var
+    regx = Regexp.new( regxs )
+    nums.each do |x|
+        ln = @buf[x]
+        #print $~ if regx.match( ln )
+    end
+end
+
+def load_requires
+    @buf = VIM::Buffer.current
+    enum = @buf.line_number
+    nums = Range.new( 1, enum )
+    nums.each do |x|
+        ln = @buf[x]
+        begin
+            eval( "require %s" % $1 ) if /.*require\s*(.*)$/.match( ln )
+        rescue Exception
+            #ignore?
+        end
+    end
+end
+
+def get_completions(base)
+    load_requires
+    input = VIM::evaluate('expand("<cWORD>")')
+    input += base
+    message = nil
+
+
+    case input
+      when /^(\/[^\/]*\/)\.([^.]*)$/
+        # Regexp
+        receiver = $1
+        message = Regexp.quote($2)
+
+        candidates = Regexp.instance_methods(true)
+        select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+
+      when /^([^\]]*\])\.([^.]*)$/
+        # Array
+        receiver = $1
+        message = Regexp.quote($2)
+
+        candidates = Array.instance_methods(true)
+        select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+
+      when /^([^\}]*\})\.([^.]*)$/
+        # Proc or Hash
+        receiver = $1
+        message = Regexp.quote($2)
+
+        candidates = Proc.instance_methods(true) | Hash.instance_methods(true)
+        select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+
+      when /^(:[^:.]*)$/
+        # Symbol
+        if Symbol.respond_to?(:all_symbols)
+          sym = $1
+          candidates = Symbol.all_symbols.collect{|s| ":" + s.id2name}
+          candidates.grep(/^#{sym}/)
+        else
+          []
+        end
+
+      when /^::([A-Z][^:\.\(]*)$/
+        # Absolute Constant or class methods
+        receiver = $1
+        candidates = Object.constants
+        candidates.grep(/^#{receiver}/).collect{|e| "::" + e}
+
+      when /^(((::)?[A-Z][^:.\(]*)+)::?([^:.]*)$/
+        # Constant or class methods
+        receiver = $1
+        message = Regexp.quote($4)
+        begin
+          candidates = eval("#{receiver}.constants | #{receiver}.methods")
+        rescue Exception
+          candidates = []
+        end
+        candidates.grep(/^#{message}/).collect{|e| receiver + "::" + e}
+
+      when /^(:[^:.]+)\.([^.]*)$/
+        # Symbol
+        receiver = $1
+        message = Regexp.quote($2)
+
+        candidates = Symbol.instance_methods(true)
+        select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+
+      when /^([0-9_]+(\.[0-9_]+)?(e[0-9]+)?)\.([^.]*)$/
+        # Numeric
+        receiver = $1
+        message = Regexp.quote($4)
+
+        begin
+          candidates = eval(receiver).methods
+        rescue Exception
+          candidates
+        end
+        select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+
+      when /^(\$[^.]*)$/
+	      candidates = global_variables.grep(Regexp.new(Regexp.quote($1)))
+
+#      when /^(\$?(\.?[^.]+)+)\.([^.]*)$/
+      when /^((\.?[^.]+)+)\.([^.]*)$/
+        # variable
+        receiver = $1
+        message = Regexp.quote($3)
+
+        cv = eval("self.class.constants")
+
+        vartype = VIM::evaluate("GetRubyVarType('%s')" % receiver)
+        if vartype != ''
+          candidates = eval("#{vartype}.instance_methods")
+        elsif (cv).include?(receiver)
+          # foo.func and foo is local var.
+          candidates = eval("#{receiver}.methods")
+        elsif /^[A-Z]/ =~ receiver and /\./ !~ receiver
+          # Foo::Bar.func
+          begin
+            candidates = eval("#{receiver}.methods")
+          rescue Exception
+            candidates = []
+          end
+        else
+          # func1.func2
+          candidates = []
+          ObjectSpace.each_object(Module){|m|
+            next if m.name != "IRB::Context" and
+              /^(IRB|SLex|RubyLex|RubyToken)/ =~ m.name
+            candidates.concat m.instance_methods(false)
+          }
+          candidates.sort!
+          candidates.uniq!
+        end
+        #identify_type( receiver )
+        select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+
+    #when /^((\.?[^.]+)+)\.([^.]*)\(\s*\)*$/
+        #function call
+        #obj = $1
+        #func = $3
+
+      when /^\.([^.]*)$/
+	# unknown(maybe String)
+
+        receiver = ""
+        message = Regexp.quote($1)
+
+        candidates = String.instance_methods(true)
+        select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+
+    else
+      candidates = eval("self.class.constants")
+
+      (candidates|ReservedWords).grep(/^#{Regexp.quote(input)}/)
+    end
+
+    #print candidates
+    if message != nil && message.length > 0
+        rexp = '^%s' % message.downcase
+        candidates.delete_if do |c|
+            c.downcase.match( rexp )
+            $~ == nil
+        end
+    end
+
+    outp = ""
+    #    tags = VIM::evaluate("taglist('^%s$')" %
+    (candidates-Object.instance_methods).each { |c| outp += "{'word':'%s','item':'%s'}," % [ c, c ] }
+    outp.sub!(/,$/, '')
+    VIM::command("let g:rbcomplete_completions = [%s]" % outp)
+end
+
+
+def select_message(receiver, message, candidates)
+  candidates.grep(/^#{message}/).collect do |e|
+    case e
+      when /^[a-zA-Z_]/
+        receiver + "." + e
+      when /^[0-9]/
+      when *Operators
+        #receiver + " " + e
+    end
+  end
+  candidates.delete_if { |x| x == nil }
+  candidates.uniq!
+  candidates.sort!
+end
+RUBYEOF
+endfunction
+
+call s:DefRuby()
+" vim: set et ts=4:

runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,517 @@
+" Vim completion script
+" Language:    SQL
+" Maintainer:  David Fishburn <fishburn@ianywhere.com>
+" Version:     2.0
+" Last Change: Mon Apr 03 2006 10:21:36 PM
+
+" Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
+" This check is in place in case this script is
+" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
+if exists('&omnifunc')
+    " Do not set the option if already set since this
+    " results in an E117 warning.
+    if &omnifunc == ""
+        setlocal omnifunc=sqlcomplete#Complete
+    endif
+endif
+
+if exists('g:loaded_sql_completion')
+    finish 
+endif
+let g:loaded_sql_completion = 1
+
+" Maintains filename of dictionary
+let s:sql_file_table        = ""
+let s:sql_file_procedure    = ""
+let s:sql_file_view         = ""
+
+" Define various arrays to be used for caching
+let s:tbl_name              = []
+let s:tbl_alias             = []
+let s:tbl_cols              = []
+let s:syn_list              = []
+let s:syn_value             = []
+ 
+" Used in conjunction with the syntaxcomplete plugin
+let s:save_inc              = ""
+let s:save_exc              = ""
+if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql')
+    let s:save_inc = g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql
+endif
+if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql')
+    let s:save_exc = g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql
+endif
+ 
+" Used with the column list
+let s:save_prev_table       = ""
+
+" Default the option to verify table alias
+if !exists('g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias')
+    let g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias = 'a'
+endif
+" Default syntax items to precache
+if !exists('g:omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups')
+    let g:omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups = [
+                \ 'syntax',
+                \ 'sqlKeyword',
+                \ 'sqlFunction',
+                \ 'sqlOption',
+                \ 'sqlType',
+                \ 'sqlStatement'
+                \ ]
+endif
+
+" This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
+function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
+
+    " Default to table name completion
+    let compl_type = 'table'
+    " Allow maps to specify what type of object completion they want
+    if exists('b:sql_compl_type')
+        let compl_type = b:sql_compl_type
+    endif
+
+    " First pass through this function determines how much of the line should
+    " be replaced by whatever is chosen from the completion list
+    if a:findstart
+        " Locate the start of the item, including "."
+        let line = getline('.')
+        let start = col('.') - 1
+        let lastword = -1
+        while start > 0
+            if line[start - 1] =~ '\w'
+                let start -= 1
+            elseif line[start - 1] =~ '\.' && compl_type =~ 'column'
+                " If the completion type is column then assume we are looking
+                " for column completion column_type can be either 
+                " 'column' or 'column_csv'
+                if lastword == -1 && compl_type == 'column'
+                    " Do not replace the table name prefix or alias
+                    " if completing only a single column name
+                    let lastword = start
+                endif
+                let start -= 1
+            else
+                break
+            endif
+        endwhile
+
+        " Return the column of the last word, which is going to be changed.
+        " Remember the text that comes before it in s:prepended.
+        if lastword == -1
+            let s:prepended = ''
+            return start
+        endif
+        let s:prepended = strpart(line, start, lastword - start)
+        return lastword
+    endif
+
+    " Second pass through this function will determine what data to put inside
+    " of the completion list
+    " s:prepended is set by the first pass
+    let base = s:prepended . a:base
+
+    " Default the completion list to an empty list
+    let compl_list = []
+
+    " Default to table name completion
+    let compl_type = 'table'
+    " Allow maps to specify what type of object completion they want
+    if exists('b:sql_compl_type')
+        let compl_type = b:sql_compl_type
+        unlet b:sql_compl_type
+    endif
+
+    if compl_type == 'tableReset'
+        let compl_type = 'table'
+        let base = ''
+    endif
+
+    if compl_type == 'table' ||
+                \ compl_type == 'procedure' ||
+                \ compl_type == 'view' 
+
+        " This type of completion relies upon the dbext.vim plugin
+        if s:SQLCCheck4dbext() == -1
+            return []
+        endif
+
+        if s:sql_file_{compl_type} == ""
+            let compl_type = substitute(compl_type, '\w\+', '\u&', '')
+            let s:sql_file_{compl_type} = DB_getDictionaryName(compl_type)
+        endif
+        let s:sql_file_{compl_type} = DB_getDictionaryName(compl_type)
+        if s:sql_file_{compl_type} != ""
+            if filereadable(s:sql_file_{compl_type})
+                let compl_list = readfile(s:sql_file_{compl_type})
+            endif
+        endif
+    elseif compl_type == 'column'
+
+        " This type of completion relies upon the dbext.vim plugin
+        if s:SQLCCheck4dbext() == -1
+            return []
+        endif
+
+        if base == ""
+            " The last time we displayed a column list we stored
+            " the table name.  If the user selects a column list 
+            " without a table name of alias present, assume they want
+            " the previous column list displayed.
+            let base = s:save_prev_table
+        endif
+
+        if base != ""
+            let compl_list        = s:SQLCGetColumns(base, '')
+            let s:save_prev_table = base
+            let base              = ''
+        endif
+    elseif compl_type == 'column_csv'
+
+        " This type of completion relies upon the dbext.vim plugin
+        if s:SQLCCheck4dbext() == -1
+            return []
+        endif
+
+        if base == ""
+            " The last time we displayed a column list we stored
+            " the table name.  If the user selects a column list 
+            " without a table name of alias present, assume they want
+            " the previous column list displayed.
+            let base = s:save_prev_table
+        endif
+
+        if base != ""
+            let compl_list        = s:SQLCGetColumns(base, 'csv')
+            let s:save_prev_table = base
+            " Join the column array into 1 single element array
+            " but make the columns column separated
+            let compl_list        = [join(compl_list, ', ')]
+            let base              = ''
+        endif
+    elseif compl_type == 'resetCache'
+        " Reset all cached items
+        let s:tbl_name  = []
+        let s:tbl_alias = []
+        let s:tbl_cols  = []
+        let s:syn_list  = []
+        let s:syn_value = []
+    else
+        let compl_list = s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(compl_type)
+    endif
+
+    if base != ''
+        " Filter the list based on the first few characters the user
+        " entered
+        let expr = 'v:val =~ "^'.base.'"'
+        let compl_list = filter(copy(compl_list), expr)
+    endif
+
+    if exists('b:sql_compl_savefunc') && b:sql_compl_savefunc != ""
+        let &omnifunc = b:sql_compl_savefunc
+    endif
+
+    return compl_list
+endfunc
+
+function! s:SQLCWarningMsg(msg)
+    echohl WarningMsg
+    echomsg a:msg 
+    echohl None
+endfunction
+      
+function! s:SQLCErrorMsg(msg)
+    echohl ErrorMsg
+    echomsg a:msg 
+    echohl None
+endfunction
+      
+function! sqlcomplete#PreCacheSyntax(...)
+    let syn_group_arr = []
+    if a:0 > 0 
+        let syn_group_arr = a:1
+    else
+        let syn_group_arr = g:omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups
+    endif
+    if !empty(syn_group_arr)
+        for group_name in syn_group_arr
+            call s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(group_name)
+        endfor
+    endif
+endfunction
+
+function! sqlcomplete#Map(type)
+    " Tell the SQL plugin what you want to complete
+    let b:sql_compl_type=a:type
+    " Record previous omnifunc, if the SQL completion
+    " is being used in conjunction with other filetype
+    " completion plugins
+    if &omnifunc != "" && &omnifunc != 'sqlcomplete#Complete'
+        " Record the previous omnifunc, the plugin
+        " will automatically set this back so that it
+        " does not interfere with other ftplugins settings
+        let b:sql_compl_savefunc=&omnifunc
+    endif
+    " Set the OMNI func for the SQL completion plugin
+    let &omnifunc='sqlcomplete#Complete'
+endfunction
+
+function! s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(syn_group)
+    let syn_group  = a:syn_group
+    let compl_list = []
+
+    " Check if we have already cached the syntax list
+    let list_idx = index(s:syn_list, syn_group, 0, &ignorecase)
+    if list_idx > -1
+        " Return previously cached value
+        let compl_list = s:syn_value[list_idx]
+    else
+        " Request the syntax list items from the 
+        " syntax completion plugin
+        if syn_group == 'syntax'
+            " Handle this special case.  This allows the user
+            " to indicate they want all the syntax items available,
+            " so do not specify a specific include list.
+            let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = ''
+        else
+            " The user has specified a specific syntax group
+            let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = syn_group
+        endif
+        let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = ''
+        let syn_value                       = OmniSyntaxList()
+        let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = s:save_inc
+        let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = s:save_exc
+        " Cache these values for later use
+        let s:syn_list  = add( s:syn_list,  syn_group )
+        let s:syn_value = add( s:syn_value, syn_value )
+        let compl_list  = syn_value
+    endif
+
+    return compl_list
+endfunction
+
+function! s:SQLCCheck4dbext()
+    if !exists('g:loaded_dbext')
+        let msg = "The dbext plugin must be loaded for dynamic SQL completion"
+        call s:SQLCErrorMsg(msg)
+        " Leave time for the user to read the error message
+        :sleep 2
+        return -1
+    elseif g:loaded_dbext < 210
+        let msg = "The dbext plugin must be at least version 2.10 " .
+                    \ " for dynamic SQL completion"
+        call s:SQLCErrorMsg(msg)
+        " Leave time for the user to read the error message
+        :sleep 2
+        return -1
+    endif
+    return 1
+endfunction
+
+function! s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
+    let table_name  = a:table_name
+    let table_alias = a:table_alias
+    let cols        = a:cols
+
+    if g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias != 'n' 
+        if table_alias == ''
+            if 'da' =~? g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias
+                if table_name =~ '_'
+                    " Treat _ as separators since people often use these
+                    " for word separators
+                    let save_keyword = &iskeyword
+                    setlocal iskeyword-=_
+
+                    " Get the first letter of each word
+                    " [[:alpha:]] is used instead of \w 
+                    " to catch extended accented characters
+                    "
+                    let table_alias = substitute( 
+                                \ table_name, 
+                                \ '\<[[:alpha:]]\+\>_\?', 
+                                \ '\=strpart(submatch(0), 0, 1)', 
+                                \ 'g'
+                                \ )
+                    " Restore original value
+                    let &iskeyword = save_keyword
+                elseif table_name =~ '\u\U'
+                    let initials = substitute(
+                                \ table_name, '\(\u\)\U*', '\1', 'g')
+                else
+                    let table_alias = strpart(table_name, 0, 1)
+                endif
+            endif
+        endif
+        if table_alias != ''
+            " Following a word character, make sure there is a . and no spaces
+            let table_alias = substitute(table_alias, '\w\zs\.\?\s*$', '.', '')
+            if 'a' =~? g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias && a:table_alias == ''
+                let table_alias = inputdialog("Enter table alias:", table_alias)
+            endif
+        endif
+        if table_alias != ''
+            let cols = substitute(cols, '\<\w', table_alias.'&', 'g')
+        endif
+    endif
+
+    return cols
+endfunction
+
+function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
+    let table_name   = matchstr(a:table_name, '^\w\+')
+    let table_cols   = []
+    let table_alias  = ''
+    let move_to_top  = 1
+
+    if g:loaded_dbext >= 210
+        let saveSettingAlias = DB_listOption('use_tbl_alias')
+        exec 'DBSetOption use_tbl_alias=n'
+    endif
+
+    " Check if we have already cached the column list for this table
+    " by its name
+    let list_idx = index(s:tbl_name, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
+    if list_idx > -1
+        let table_cols = split(s:tbl_cols[list_idx])
+    else
+        " Check if we have already cached the column list for this table 
+        " by its alias, assuming the table_name provided was actually
+        " the alias for the table instead
+        "     select *
+        "       from area a
+        "      where a.
+        let list_idx = index(s:tbl_alias, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
+        if list_idx > -1
+            let table_alias = table_name
+            let table_name  = s:tbl_name[list_idx]
+            let table_cols  = split(s:tbl_cols[list_idx])
+        endif
+    endif
+
+    " If we have not found a cached copy of the table
+    " And the table ends in a "." or we are looking for a column list
+    " if list_idx == -1 && (a:table_name =~ '\.' || b:sql_compl_type =~ 'column')
+    " if list_idx == -1 && (a:table_name =~ '\.' || a:list_type =~ 'csv')
+    if list_idx == -1 
+         let saveY      = @y
+         let saveSearch = @/
+         let saveWScan  = &wrapscan
+         let curline    = line(".")
+         let curcol     = col(".")
+
+         " Do not let searchs wrap
+         setlocal nowrapscan
+         " If . was entered, look at the word just before the .
+         " We are looking for something like this:
+         "    select * 
+         "      from customer c
+         "     where c.
+         " So when . is pressed, we need to find 'c'
+         "
+
+         " Search backwards to the beginning of the statement
+         " and do NOT wrap
+         " exec 'silent! normal! v?\<\(select\|update\|delete\|;\)\>'."\n".'"yy'
+         exec 'silent! normal! ?\<\(select\|update\|delete\|;\)\>'."\n"
+
+         " Start characterwise visual mode
+         " Advance right one character
+         " Search foward until one of the following:
+         "     1.  Another select/update/delete statement
+         "     2.  A ; at the end of a line (the delimiter)
+         "     3.  The end of the file (incase no delimiter)
+         " Yank the visually selected text into the "y register.
+         exec 'silent! normal! vl/\(\<select\>\|\<update\>\|\<delete\>\|;\s*$\|\%$\)'."\n".'"yy'
+
+         let query = @y
+         let query = substitute(query, "\n", ' ', 'g')
+         let found = 0
+
+         " if query =~? '^\(select\|update\|delete\)'
+         if query =~? '^\(select\)'
+             let found = 1
+             "  \(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?   - 
+             " 'from.\{-}'  - Starting at the from clause
+             " '\zs\(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?' - Get the owner name (optional)
+             " '\<\w\+\>\ze' - Get the table name 
+             " '\s\+\<'.table_name.'\>' - Followed by the alias
+             " '\s*\.\@!.*'  - Cannot be followed by a .
+             " '\(\<where\>\|$\)' - Must be followed by a WHERE clause
+             " '.*'  - Exclude the rest of the line in the match
+             let table_name_new = matchstr(@y, 
+                         \ 'from.\{-}'.
+                         \ '\zs\(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?'.
+                         \ '\<\w\+\>\ze'.
+                         \ '\s\+\%(as\s\+\)\?\<'.table_name.'\>'.
+                         \ '\s*\.\@!.*'.
+                         \ '\(\<where\>\|$\)'.
+                         \ '.*'
+                         \ )
+             if table_name_new != ''
+                 let table_alias = table_name
+                 let table_name  = table_name_new
+
+                 let list_idx = index(s:tbl_name, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
+                 if list_idx > -1
+                     let table_cols  = split(s:tbl_cols[list_idx])
+                     let s:tbl_name[list_idx]  = table_name
+                     let s:tbl_alias[list_idx] = table_alias
+                 else
+                     let list_idx = index(s:tbl_alias, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
+                     if list_idx > -1
+                         let table_cols = split(s:tbl_cols[list_idx])
+                         let s:tbl_name[list_idx]  = table_name
+                         let s:tbl_alias[list_idx] = table_alias
+                     endif
+                 endif
+
+             endif
+         else
+             " Simply assume it is a table name provided with a . on the end
+             let found = 1
+         endif
+
+         let @y        = saveY
+         let @/        = saveSearch
+         let &wrapscan = saveWScan
+
+         " Return to previous location
+         call cursor(curline, curcol)
+         
+         if found == 0
+             if g:loaded_dbext > 201
+                 exec 'DBSetOption use_tbl_alias='.saveSettingAlias
+             endif
+
+             " Not a SQL statement, do not display a list
+             return []
+         endif
+    endif 
+
+    if empty(table_cols)
+        " Specify silent mode, no messages to the user (tbl, 1)
+        " Specify do not comma separate (tbl, 1, 1)
+        let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn(table_name, 1, 1)
+
+        if table_cols_str != ""
+            let s:tbl_name  = add( s:tbl_name,  table_name )
+            let s:tbl_alias = add( s:tbl_alias, table_alias )
+            let s:tbl_cols  = add( s:tbl_cols,  table_cols_str )
+            let table_cols  = split(table_cols_str)
+        endif
+
+    endif
+
+    if g:loaded_dbext > 201
+        exec 'DBSetOption use_tbl_alias='.saveSettingAlias
+    endif
+
+    if a:list_type == 'csv' && !empty(table_cols)
+        let cols = join(table_cols, ', ')
+        let cols = s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
+        let table_cols = [cols]
+    endif
+
+    return table_cols
+endfunction
+

runtime/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,18 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:    All languages, uses existing syntax highlighting rules
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <fishburn@ianywhere.com>
-" Version:     1.0
-" Last Change: Sun Jan 08 2006 10:17:51 PM
+" Version:     1.3
+" Last Change: Mon Mar 27 2006 9:29:35 PM
 
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
-if exists('&ofu')
-    setlocal ofu=syntaxcomplete#Complete
+" This check is in place in case this script is
+" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
+if exists('+omnifunc')
+    " Do not set the option if already set since this
+    " results in an E117 warning.
+    if &omnifunc == ""
+        setlocal omnifunc=syntaxcomplete#Complete
+    endif
 endif
 
 if exists('g:loaded_syntax_completion')
@@ -22,6 +28,7 @@ let s:syn_remove_words = 'match,matchgroup=,contains,'.
 
 let s:cache_name = []
 let s:cache_list = []
+let s:prepended  = ''
 
 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
 function! syntaxcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
@@ -62,7 +69,7 @@ function! syntaxcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     if list_idx > -1
         let compl_list = s:cache_list[list_idx]
     else
-        let compl_list = s:SyntaxList()
+        let compl_list = OmniSyntaxList()
         let s:cache_name  = add( s:cache_name,  &filetype )
         let s:cache_list  = add( s:cache_list,  compl_list )
     endif
@@ -78,7 +85,7 @@ function! syntaxcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     return compl_list
 endfunc
 
-function! s:SyntaxList()
+function! OmniSyntaxList()
     let saveL = @l
     
     " Loop through all the syntax groupnames, and build a
@@ -86,63 +93,146 @@ function! s:SyntaxList()
     " work generically for any filetype that does not already
     " have a plugin defined.
     " This ASSUMES the syntax groupname BEGINS with the name
-    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\sytax 
+    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax 
     " directory.
     redir @l
     silent! exec 'syntax list '
     redir END
 
-    let syntax_groups = @l
+    let syntax_full = "\n".@l
     let @l = saveL
 
-    if syntax_groups =~ 'E28' 
-                \ || syntax_groups =~ 'E411'
-                \ || syntax_groups =~ 'E415'
-                \ || syntax_groups =~ 'No sytax items'
-        return -1
+    if syntax_full =~ 'E28' 
+                \ || syntax_full =~ 'E411'
+                \ || syntax_full =~ 'E415'
+                \ || syntax_full =~ 'No Syntax items'
+        return []
     endif
 
-    " Abort names - match, links to, matchgroup=, start=, contains=, contained,
-    "               cluster=, nextgroup=, end=
+    " Default the include group to include the requested syntax group
+    let syntax_group_include_{&filetype} = ''
+    " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
+    if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_'.&filetype)
+        let syntax_group_include_{&filetype} =
+                    \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{&filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+        if syntax_group_include_{&filetype} =~ '\w'
+            let syntax_group_include_{&filetype} = 
+                        \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{&filetype}, 
+                        \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
+                        \ )
+        endif
+    endif
+
+    " Default the exclude group to nothing
+    let syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype} = ''
+    " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
+    if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_'.&filetype)
+        let syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype} =
+                    \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+        if syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype} =~ '\w' 
+            let syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype} = 
+                        \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype}, 
+                        \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
+                        \ )
+        endif
+    endif
+
+    " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current 
+    " filetype.  They can contain additional items added by the user
+    " via autocmds or their vimrc.
+    " Some syntax files can be combined (html, php, jsp).
+    " We want only items that begin with the filetype we are interested in.
     let next_group_regex = '\n' .
                 \ '\zs'.&filetype.'\w\+\ze'.
-                \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'.
-                \ '\<\('.
-                \ substitute(s:syn_remove_words, ',', '\\|', 'g').
-                \ '\)\@!'
+                \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
     let syn_list = ''
     let index    = 0
-    let index    = match(syntax_groups, next_group_regex, index)
-
+    let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
 
     while index > 0
-        let group_name = matchstr( syntax_groups, '\w\+', index )
+        let group_name = matchstr( syntax_full, '\w\+', index )
 
-        let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxGroupItems(group_name)
+        let get_syn_list = 1
+        " if syntax_group_include_{&filetype} == ''
+        "     if syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype} != ''
+        "         if '\<'.syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype}.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+        "             let get_syn_list = 0
+        "         endif
+        "     endif
+        " else
+        "     if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{&filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+        "         let get_syn_list = 0
+        "     endif
+        " endif
+        if syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype} != ''
+            if '\<'.syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype}.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+                let get_syn_list = 0
+            endif
+        endif
+    
+        if get_syn_list == 1
+            if syntax_group_include_{&filetype} != ''
+                if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{&filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+                    let get_syn_list = 0
+                endif
+            endif
+        endif
 
-        let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
+        if get_syn_list == 1
+            " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we 
+            " are interested in.
+            let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems(group_name, syntax_full)
+
+            let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
+        endif
 
         let index = index + strlen(group_name)
-        let index = match(syntax_groups, next_group_regex, index)
+        let index = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
     endwhile
 
-    return sort(split(syn_list))
+    " Convert the string to a List and sort it.
+    let compl_list = sort(split(syn_list))
+
+    if &filetype == 'vim'
+        let short_compl_list = []
+        for i in range(len(compl_list))
+            if i == len(compl_list)-1
+                let next = i
+            else
+                let next = i + 1
+            endif
+            if  compl_list[next] !~ '^'.compl_list[i].'.$'
+                let short_compl_list += [compl_list[i]]
+            endif
+        endfor
+
+        return short_compl_list
+    else
+        return compl_list
+    endif
 endfunction
 
-function! s:SyntaxGroupItems( group_name )
-    let saveL = @l
-    
-    " Generate (based on the syntax highlight rules) a list of
-    " the Statements, functions, keywords and so on available
-    " If this needs updating, the syntax\sql.vim file should be
-    " updated
-    redir @l
-    silent! exec 'syntax list ' . a:group_name
-    redir END
+function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
 
-    if @l !~ 'E28'
+    let syn_list = ""
+
+    " From the full syntax listing, strip out the portion for the
+    " request group.
+    " Query:
+    "     \n           - must begin with a newline
+    "     a:group_name - the group name we are interested in
+    "     \s\+xxx\s\+  - group names are always followed by xxx
+    "     \zs          - start the match
+    "     .\{-}        - everything ...
+    "     \ze          - end the match
+    "     \n\w         - at the first newline starting with a character
+    let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full, 
+                \ "\n".a:group_name.'\s\+xxx\s\+\zs.\{-}\ze'."\n".'\w'
+                \)
+
+    if syntax_group != ""
         " let syn_list = substitute( @l, '^.*xxx\s*\%(contained\s*\)\?', "", '' )
-        let syn_list = substitute( @l, '^.*xxx\s*', "", '' )
+        " let syn_list = substitute( @l, '^.*xxx\s*', "", '' )
 
         " We only want the words for the lines begining with
         " containedin, but there could be other items.
@@ -152,7 +242,7 @@ function! s:SyntaxGroupItems( group_name )
         "    contained nextgroup=...
         " So this will strip off the ending of lines with known
         " keywords.
-        let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<\('.
+        let syn_list = substitute( syntax_group, '\<\('.
                     \ substitute(
                     \ escape( s:syn_remove_words, '\\/.*$^~[]')
                     \ , ',', '\\|', 'g').
@@ -172,8 +262,6 @@ function! s:SyntaxGroupItems( group_name )
         let syn_list = ''
     endif
 
-    let @l = saveL
-
     return syn_list
 endfunction
 

runtime/autoload/tar.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " tar.vim: Handles browsing tarfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:			Dec 24, 2005
+" Date:			Mar 27, 2006
 " Version:		7
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <drchipNOSPAM at campbellfamily dot biz>
 " License:		Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
@@ -25,6 +25,7 @@ if exists("g:loaded_tar")
  finish
 endif
 let g:loaded_tar= "v7"
+"call Decho("loading autoload/tar.vim")
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 "  Default Settings: {{{1
@@ -34,6 +35,9 @@ endif
 if !exists("g:tar_readoptions")
  let g:tar_readoptions= "OPxf"
 endif
+if !exists("g:tar_cmd")
+ let g:tar_cmd= "tar"
+endif
 if !exists("g:tar_writeoptions")
  let g:tar_writeoptions= "uf"
 endif
@@ -50,14 +54,15 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
   set report=10
 
   " sanity checks
-  if !executable("tar")
-   echohl Error | echo '***error*** (tar#Browse) "tar" not available on your system'
+  if !executable(g:tar_cmd)
+   echohl Error | echo '***error*** (tar#Browse) "'.g:tar_cmd.'" not available on your system'
    call inputsave()|call input("Press <cr> to continue")|call inputrestore()
    let &report= repkeep
 "   call Dret("tar#Browse")
    return
   endif
   if !filereadable(a:tarfile)
+"   call Decho('a:tarfile<'.a:tarfile.'> not filereadable')
    if a:tarfile !~# '^\a\+://'
     " if its an url, don't complain, let url-handlers such as vim do its thing
     echohl Error | echo "***error*** (tar#Browse) File not readable<".a:tarfile.">" | echohl None
@@ -80,20 +85,33 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
   set ft=tar
 
   " give header
+"  call Decho("printing header")
   exe "$put ='".'\"'." tar.vim version ".g:loaded_tar."'"
   exe "$put ='".'\"'." Browsing tarfile ".a:tarfile."'"
   exe "$put ='".'\"'." Select a file with cursor and press ENTER"."'"
   0d
   $
 
-  if a:tarfile =~# '\.\(gz\|tgz\)$'
-   exe "silent r! gzip -d -c '".a:tarfile."'| tar -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
-  elseif a:tarfile =~# '\.bz2$'
-   exe "silent r! bzip2 -d -c '".a:tarfile."'| tar -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
-  else
-   exe "silent r! tar -".g:tar_browseoptions." '".a:tarfile."'"
+  let tarfile= a:tarfile
+  if has("win32") && executable("cygpath")
+   " assuming cygwin
+   let tarfile=substitute(system("cygpath -u ".tarfile),'\n$','','e')
+  endif
+  if tarfile =~# '\.\(gz\|tgz\)$'
+"   call Decho("exe silent r! gzip -d -c '".tarfile."'| tar -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
+   exe "silent r! gzip -d -c '".tarfile."'| tar -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.bz2$'
+"   call Decho("exe silent r! bzip2 -d -c '".tarfile."'| tar -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
+   exe "silent r! bzip2 -d -c '".tarfile."'| tar -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
+  else
+"   call Decho("exe silent r! ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." '".tarfile."'")
+   exe "silent r! ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." '".tarfile."'"
+  endif
+  if v:shell_error != 0
+   echohl Error | echo '***error*** (tar#Browse) while browsing; check your g:tar_browseoptions<".g:tar_browseoptions.">"
+"  call Dret("tar#Browse : w:tarfile<".w:tarfile.">")
+   return
   endif
-  silent %g@/$@d
 
   setlocal noma nomod ro
   noremap <silent> <buffer> <cr> :call <SID>TarBrowseSelect()<cr>
@@ -121,12 +139,21 @@ fun! s:TarBrowseSelect()
   " about to make a new window, need to use w:tarfile
   let tarfile= w:tarfile
   let curfile= expand("%")
+  if has("win32") && executable("cygpath")
+   " assuming cygwin
+   let tarfile=substitute(system("cygpath -u ".tarfile),'\n$','','e')
+  endif
 
   new
   wincmd _
   let s:tblfile_{winnr()}= curfile
-"  call Decho("exe e tarfile:".tarfile.':'.fname)
-  exe "e tarfile:".tarfile.':'.fname
+"  if has("unix")
+""   call Decho("exe e tarfile:".tarfile.':'.fname)
+"   exe "e tarfile:".tarfile.':'.fname
+"  elseif has("win32")
+"   call tar#Read("tarfile:".tarfile.':'.fname,1)
+"  endif
+  call tar#Read("tarfile:".tarfile.':'.fname,1)
   filetype detect
 
   let &report= repkeep
@@ -141,7 +168,12 @@ fun! tar#Read(fname,mode)
   set report=10
   let tarfile = substitute(a:fname,'tarfile:\(.\{-}\):.*$','\1','')
   let fname   = substitute(a:fname,'tarfile:.\{-}:\(.*\)$','\1','')
-"  call Decho("tarfile<".tarfile."> fname<".fname.">")
+  if has("win32") && executable("cygpath")
+   " assuming cygwin
+   let tarfile=substitute(system("cygpath -u ".tarfile),'\n$','','e')
+  endif
+"  call Decho("tarfile<".tarfile.">")
+"  call Decho("fname<".fname.">")
 
   if tarfile =~# '\.\(gz\|tgz\)$'
 "   call Decho("exe silent r! gzip -d -c '".tarfile."'| tar -OPxf - '".fname."'")
@@ -151,7 +183,7 @@ fun! tar#Read(fname,mode)
    exe "silent r! bzip2 -d -c '".tarfile."'| tar -".g:tar_readoptions." - '".fname."'"
   else
 "   call Decho("exe silent r! tar -".g:tar_readoptions." '".tarfile."' '".fname."'")
-   exe "silent r! tar -".g:tar_readoptions." '".tarfile."' '".fname."'"
+   exe "silent r! ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_readoptions." '".tarfile."' '".fname."'"
   endif
   let w:tarfile= a:fname
   exe "file tarfile:".fname
@@ -172,8 +204,8 @@ fun! tar#Write(fname)
   set report=10
 
   " sanity checks
-  if !executable("tar")
-   echohl Error | echo '***error*** (tar#Browse) "tar" not available on your system'
+  if !executable(g:tar_cmd)
+   echohl Error | echo '***error*** (tar#Browse) "'.g:tar_cmd.'" not available on your system'
    call inputsave()|call input("Press <cr> to continue")|call inputrestore()
    let &report= repkeep
 "   call Dret("tar#Write")

runtime/autoload/vimball.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+" vimball : construct a file containing both paths and files
+" Author: Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
+" Date:   Mar 31, 2006
+" Version: 6
+" GetLatestVimScripts: 1502 1 :AutoInstall: vimball.vim
+" Copyright: (c) 2004-2006 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
+"            The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt
+"            (see |copyright|) except use "Vimball" instead of "Vim".
+"            No warranty, express or implied.
+"  *** ***   Use At-Your-Own-Risk!   *** ***
+
+" ---------------------------------------------------------------------
+"  Load Once: {{{1
+if &cp || exists("g:loaded_vimball")
+ finish
+endif
+let s:keepcpo        = &cpo
+let g:loaded_vimball = "v6"
+set cpo&vim
+
+" =====================================================================
+"  Functions: {{{1
+
+" ---------------------------------------------------------------------
+" MkVimball: creates a vimball given a list of paths to files {{{2
+" Vimball Format:
+"     path
+"     filesize
+"     [file]
+"     path
+"     filesize
+"     [file]
+fun! vimball#MkVimball(line1,line2,writelevel,vimballname) range
+"  call Dfunc("MkVimball(line1=".a:line1." line2=".a:line2." writelevel=".a:writelevel." vimballname<".a:vimballname.">")
+  let vbname= substitute(a:vimballname,'\.[^.]*$','','e').'.vba'
+  if !a:writelevel && filereadable(vbname)
+   echohl Error | echoerr "(MkVimball) file<".vbname."> exists; use ! to insist" | echohl None
+"   call Dret("MkVimball : file<".vbname."> already exists; use ! to insist")
+   return
+  endif
+
+  " user option bypass
+  let eikeep= &ei
+  set ei=all
+
+  let home   = substitute(&rtp,',.*$','','')
+  let curdir = getcwd()
+  exe "cd ".home
+
+  " record current tab, initialize while loop index
+  let curtabnr = tabpagenr()
+  let linenr   = a:line1
+"  call Decho("curtabnr=".curtabnr)
+
+  while linenr <= a:line2
+   let svfile  = getline(linenr)
+"   call Decho("svfile<".svfile.">")
+ 
+   if !filereadable(svfile)
+    echohl Error | echo "unable to read file<".svfile.">" | echohl None
+    let &ei= eikeep
+    exe "cd ".curdir
+"    call Dret("MkVimball")
+    return
+   endif
+ 
+   " create/switch to mkvimball tab
+   if !exists("vbtabnr")
+    tabnew
+    silent! file Vimball
+    let vbtabnr= tabpagenr()
+   else
+    exe "tabn ".vbtabnr
+   endif
+ 
+   let lastline= line("$") + 1
+   if lastline == 2 && getline("$") == ""
+	call setline(1,'" Vimball Archiver by Charles E. Campbell, Jr., Ph.D.')
+	call setline(2,'UseVimball')
+	call setline(3,'finish')
+	let lastline= 4
+   endif
+   call setline(lastline  ,svfile)
+   call setline(lastline+1,0)
+   exe "$r ".svfile
+   call setline(lastline+1,line("$") - lastline - 1)
+"   call Decho("lastline=".lastline." line$=".line("$"))
+
+  " restore to normal tab
+   exe "tabn ".curtabnr
+   let linenr= linenr + 1
+  endwhile
+
+  " write the vimball
+  exe "tabn ".vbtabnr
+  exe "cd ".curdir
+  if a:writelevel
+   exe "w! ".vbname
+  else
+   exe "w ".vbname
+  endif
+"  call Decho("Vimball<".vbname."> created")
+  echo "Vimball<".vbname."> created"
+
+  " remove the evidence
+  setlocal nomod bh=wipe
+  exe "tabn ".curtabnr
+  exe "tabc ".vbtabnr
+
+  " restore options
+  let &ei= eikeep
+
+"  call Dret("MkVimball")
+endfun
+
+" ---------------------------------------------------------------------
+" Vimball: {{{2
+fun! vimball#Vimball(really)
+"  call Dfunc("Vimball(really=".a:really.")")
+
+  if getline(1) !~ '^" Vimball Archiver by Charles E. Campbell, Jr., Ph.D.$'
+   echoerr "(Vimball) The current file does not appear to be a Vimball!"
+"   call Dret("Vimball")
+   return
+  endif
+
+  " initialize
+  let regakeep = @a
+  let eikeep   = &ei
+  let vekeep   = &ve
+  let makeep   = getpos("'a")
+  let curtabnr = tabpagenr()
+  set ei=all ve=all
+
+  " set up vimball tab
+  tabnew
+  silent! file Vimball
+  let vbtabnr= tabpagenr()
+  let didhelp= ""
+
+  " go to vim plugin home
+  let home   = substitute(&rtp,',.*$','','')
+  let curdir = getcwd()
+"  call Decho("exe cd ".home)
+  exe "cd ".home
+  let linenr  = 4
+  let filecnt = 0
+
+  " give title to listing of (extracted) files from Vimball Archive
+  if a:really
+   echohl Title | echomsg "Vimball Archive" | echohl None
+  else
+   echohl Title | echomsg "Vimball Archive Listing" | echohl None
+  endif
+
+  " apportion vimball contents to various files
+"  call Decho("exe tabn ".curtabnr)
+  exe "tabn ".curtabnr
+"  call Decho("linenr=".linenr." line$=".line("$"))
+  while 1 < linenr && linenr < line("$")
+   let fname   = getline(linenr)
+   let fsize   = getline(linenr+1)
+   let filecnt = filecnt + 1
+   if a:really
+    echomsg "extracted <".fname.">: ".fsize." lines"
+   else
+    echomsg "would extract <".fname.">: ".fsize." lines"
+   endif
+"   call Decho(linenr.": will extract file<".fname.">")
+"   call Decho((linenr+1).": fsize=".fsize)
+
+   " make directories if they don't exist yet
+   let fnamebuf= fname
+   while fnamebuf =~ '/'
+   	let dirname  = substitute(fnamebuf,'/.*$','','e')
+   	let fnamebuf = substitute(fnamebuf,'^.\{-}/\(.*\)$','\1','e')
+	if !isdirectory(dirname)
+"	 call Decho("making <".dirname.">")
+	 call mkdir(dirname)
+	endif
+	exe "cd ".dirname
+   endwhile
+   exe "cd ".home
+
+   " grab specified qty of lines and place into "a" buffer
+   exe linenr
+   norm! jjma
+   exe (linenr + fsize + 1)
+   silent norm! "ay'a
+"   call Decho("yanked ".fsize." lines into register-a")
+
+"   call Decho("didhelp<".didhelp."> fname<".fname.">")
+   if a:really && didhelp == "" && fname =~ 'doc/[^/]\+\.txt$'
+   	let didhelp= substitute(fname,'^\(.*\<doc\)[/\\][^.]*\.txt$','\1','e')
+"	call Decho("didhelp<".didhelp.">")
+   endif
+
+   " copy "a" buffer into tab
+"   call Decho('copy "a buffer into tab#'.vbtabnr)
+   exe "tabn ".vbtabnr
+   silent! %d
+   silent norm! "aPGdd1G
+"   call Decho("rega<".@a.">")
+
+   " write tab to file
+   if a:really
+"    call Decho("exe w! ".fname)
+    exe "silent w! ".fname
+   endif
+
+"   call Decho("exe tabn ".curtabnr)
+   exe "tabn ".curtabnr
+"   let oldlinenr = linenr " Decho
+   let linenr    = linenr + fsize + 2
+"   call Decho("update linenr= [linenr=".oldlinenr."] + [fsize=".fsize."] + 2 = ".linenr)
+  endwhile
+
+  " set up help
+"  call Decho("about to set up help: didhelp<".didhelp.">")
+  if didhelp != ""
+"   call Decho("exe helptags ".home."/".didhelp)
+   exe "helptags ".home."/".didhelp
+   echomsg "did helptags"
+  endif
+
+  " make sure a "Press ENTER..." prompt appears to keep the messages showing!
+  while filecnt <= &ch
+   echomsg " "
+   let filecnt= filecnt + 1
+  endwhile
+
+  " restore events, delete tab and buffer
+  exe "tabn ".vbtabnr
+  setlocal nomod bh=wipe
+  exe "tabn ".curtabnr
+  exe "tabc ".vbtabnr
+  let &ei= eikeep
+  let @a = regakeep
+  if makeep[0] != 0
+   " restore mark a
+"   call Decho("restore mark-a: makeep=".string(makeep))
+   call setpos("'a",makeep)
+   ka
+  endif
+  exe "cd ".curdir
+
+"  call Dret("Vimball")
+endfun
+
+let &cpo= s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+" =====================================================================
+" Modelines: {{{1
+" vim: fdm=marker

runtime/autoload/xml/xsl.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+let g:xmldata_xsl = {
+	\ 'apply-imports' : [[], {}],
+    \ 'apply-templates' : [['sort', 'with-param'], {'select' : [], 'mode' : []}],
+    \ 'attribute' : [[], {'name' : [], 'namespace' : []}],
+    \ 'attribute-set' : [['attribute'], {'name' : [], 'use-attribute-sets' : []}],
+    \ 'call-template' : [['with-param'], {'name' : []}],
+    \ 'choose' : [['when', 'otherwise'], {}],
+    \ 'comment' : [[], {}],
+    \ 'copy' : [[], {'use-attribute-sets' : []}],
+    \ 'copy-of' : [[], {'select' : []}],
+    \ 'decimal-format' : [[], {'name' : [], 'decimal-separator' : [], 'grouping-separator' : [], 'infinity' : [], 'minus-sign' : [], 'NaN' : [], 'percent' : [], 'per-mille' : [], 'zero-digit' : [], 'digit' : [], 'pattern-separator' : []}],
+    \ 'element' : [[], {'name' : [], 'namespace' : [], 'use-attribute-sets' : []}],
+    \ 'fallback' : [[], {}],
+    \ 'for-each' : [['sort'], {'select' : []}],
+    \ 'if' : [[], {'test' : []}],
+    \ 'import' : [[], {'href' : []}],
+    \ 'include' : [[], {'href' : []}],
+    \ 'key' : [[], {'name' : [], 'match' : [], 'use' : []}],
+    \ 'message' : [[], {'terminate' : ['yes', 'no']}],
+    \ 'namespace-alias' : [[], {'stylesheet-prefix' : ['#default'], 'result-prefix' : ['#default']}],
+    \ 'number' : [[], {'level' : ['single', 'multiple', 'any'], 'count' : [], 'from' : [], 'value' : [], 'format' : [], 'lang' : [], 'letter-value' : ['alphabetic', 'traditional'], 'grouping-separator' : [], 'grouping-size' : []}],
+    \ 'otherwise' : [[], {}],
+    \ 'output' : [[], {'method' : ['xml', 'html', 'text'], 'version' : [], 'encoding' : [], 'omit-xml-declaration' : ['yes', 'no'], 'standalone' : ['yes', 'no'], 'doctype-public' : [], 'doctype-system' : [], 'cdata-section-elements' : [], 'indent' : ['yes', 'no'], 'media-type' : []}],
+    \ 'param' : [[], {'name' : [], 'select' : []}],
+    \ 'preserve-space' : [[], {'elements' : []}],
+    \ 'processing-instruction' : [[], {'name' : []}],
+    \ 'sort' : [[], {'select' : [], 'lang' : [], 'data-type' : ['text', 'number'], 'order' : ['ascending', 'descending'], 'case-order' : ['upper-first', 'lower-first']}],
+    \ 'strip-space' : [[], {'elements' : []}],
+    \ 'stylesheet' : [['import', 'attribute-set', 'decimal-format', 'include', 'key', 'namespace-alias', 'output', 'param', 'preserve-space', 'strip-space', 'template'], {'id' : [], 'extension-element-prefixes' : [], 'version' : []}],
+    \ 'template' : [['param'], {'match' : [], 'name' : [], 'priority' : [], 'mode' : []}],
+    \ 'text' : [[], {'disable-output-escaping' : ['yes', 'no']}],
+    \ 'transform' : [['import', 'attribute-set', 'decimal-format', 'include', 'key', 'namespace-alias', 'output', 'param', 'preserve-space', 'strip-space', 'template'], {'id' : [], 'extension-element-prefixes' : [], 'exclude-result-prefixes' : [], 'version' : []}],
+    \ 'value-of' : [[], {'select' : [], 'disable-output-escaping' : ['yes', 'no']}],
+    \ 'variable' : [[], {'name' : [], 'select' : []}],
+    \ 'when' : [[], {'test' : []}],
+    \ 'with-param' : [[], {'name' : [], 'select' : []}]}
+

runtime/autoload/xmlcomplete.vim

@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	XML
 " Maintainer:	Mikolaj Machowski ( mikmach AT wp DOT pl )
-" Last Change:	2006 Feb 18
+" Last Change:	2006 Apr 12
 
 " This function will create Dictionary with users namespace strings and values
 " canonical (system) names of data files.  Names should be lowercase,
 " descriptive to avoid any future conflicts. For example 'xhtml10s' should be
 " name for data of XHTML 1.0 Strict and 'xhtml10t' for XHTML 1.0 Transitional
-" User interface will be provided by XMLns command defined ...
+" User interface will be provided by XMLns command defined in ftplugin/xml.vim
 " Currently supported canonicals are:
 " xhtml10s - XHTML 1.0 Strict
 " xsl      - XSL
-function! xmlcomplete#CreateConnection(canonical, ...)
+function! xmlcomplete#CreateConnection(canonical, ...) " {{{
 
 	" When only one argument provided treat name as default namespace (without
 	" 'prefix:').
@@ -42,14 +42,16 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CreateConnection(canonical, ...)
 	let g:xmldata_connection[users] = a:canonical
 
 endfunction
+" }}}
 
-function! xmlcomplete#CreateEntConnection(...)
+function! xmlcomplete#CreateEntConnection(...) " {{{
 	if a:0 > 0
 		let g:xmldata_entconnect = a:1
 	else
 		let g:xmldata_entconnect = 'DEFAULT'
 	endif
 endfunction
+" }}}
 
 function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
   if a:findstart
@@ -81,8 +83,9 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 				let context_lines = getline(curline-i, curline)
 				let b:compl_context = join(context_lines, ' ')
 				break
-			elseif context_line =~ '>[^<]*$'
+			elseif context_line =~ '>[^<]*$' || i == curline
 				" Normal tag line, no need for completion at all
+				" OR reached first line without tag at all
 				let b:compl_context = ''
 				break
 			endif
@@ -103,7 +106,7 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
     return start
 
   else
-	" There is no connction of namespace and data file. Abandon action
+	" There is no connection of namespace and data file. Abandon action
 	if !exists("g:xmldata_connection") || g:xmldata_connection == {}
 		return []
 	endif
@@ -223,8 +226,13 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 			let attrs = ['encoding', 'version="1.0"', 'version']
 		elseif tag =~ '^!'
 			" Don't make completion at all
+			"
 			return []
 		else
+            if !has_key(g:xmldata{'_'.g:xmldata_connection[b:xml_namespace]}, tag)
+				" Abandon when data file isn't complete
+ 				return []
+ 			endif
 			let attrs = keys(g:xmldata{'_'.g:xmldata_connection[b:xml_namespace]}[tag][1])
 		endif
 
@@ -299,7 +307,6 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 	endif
 
 	" Complete text declaration
-	let g:co = context
 	if context =~ '^?'
 		let tags = ['?xml']
 
@@ -323,6 +330,10 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 	    let tags = keys(g:xmldata{'_'.g:xmldata_connection[b:xml_namespace]})
 		call filter(tags, 'v:val !~ "^vimxml"')
 	else
+		if !has_key(g:xmldata{'_'.g:xmldata_connection[b:xml_namespace]}, opentag)
+			" Abandon when data file isn't complete
+			return []
+		endif
 		let tags = g:xmldata{'_'.g:xmldata_connection[b:xml_namespace]}[opentag][0]
 	endif
 
@@ -336,6 +347,11 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 		endif
 	endfor
 	let menu = res + res2
+	if b:xml_namespace == 'DEFAULT'
+		let xml_namespace = ''
+	else
+		let xml_namespace = b:xml_namespace.':'
+	endif
 	if has_key(g:xmldata{'_'.g:xmldata_connection[b:xml_namespace]}, 'vimxmltaginfo')
 		let final_menu = []
 		for i in range(len(menu))
@@ -347,22 +363,18 @@ function! xmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
 				let m_menu = ''
 				let m_info = ''
 			endif
-			if b:xml_namespace == 'DEFAULT'
-				let xml_namespace = ''
-			else
-				let xml_namespace = b:xml_namespace.':'
-			endif
 			let final_menu += [{'word':xml_namespace.item, 'menu':m_menu, 'info':m_info}]
 		endfor
 	else
-		let final_menu = menu
+		let final_menu = map(menu, 'xml_namespace.v:val')
 	endif
+
 	return final_menu
 
   endif
 endfunction
 
-" MM: This is greatly reduced closetag.vim used with kind permission of Steven
+" MM: This is severely reduced closetag.vim used with kind permission of Steven
 "     Mueller
 "     Changes: strip all comments; delete error messages; add checking for
 "     namespace
@@ -500,3 +512,4 @@ endfunction
 function! s:Clearstack(sname)
 	exe 'let '.a:sname."=''"
 endfunction
+" vim:set foldmethod=marker:

runtime/autoload/zip.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " zip.vim: Handles browsing zipfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:			Dec 21, 2005
-" Version:		6
+" Date:			Apr 10, 2006
+" Version:		8
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <drchipNOSPAM at campbellfamily dot biz>
 " License:		Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
 " Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
@@ -22,7 +22,8 @@ if exists("g:loaded_zip")
  finish
 endif
 
-let g:loaded_zip= "v6"
+let g:loaded_zip     = "v8"
+let s:zipfile_escape = ' ?&;\'
 
 " ----------------
 "  Functions: {{{1
@@ -53,6 +54,7 @@ fun! zip#Browse(zipfile)
 "   call Dret("zip#Browse : file<".a:zipfile."> not readable")
    return
   endif
+"  call Decho("passed sanity checks")
   if &ma != 1
    set ma
   endif
@@ -73,10 +75,17 @@ fun! zip#Browse(zipfile)
   0d
   $
 
-  exe "silent r! unzip -l ".a:zipfile
+"  call Decho("exe silent r! unzip -l '".a:zipfile."'")
+  exe "silent r! unzip -l '".a:zipfile."'"
+"  call Decho("line 6: ".getline(6))
+  let namecol= stridx(getline(6),'Name') + 1
+"  call Decho("namecol=".namecol)
+  4,$g/^\s*----/d
+  4,$g/^\s*\a/d
   $d
-  silent 4,$v/^\s\+\d\+\s\{0,5}\d/d
-  silent  4,$s/^\%(.*\)\s\+\(\S\)/\1/
+  if namecol > 0
+   exe 'silent 4,$s/^.*\%'.namecol.'c//'
+  endif
 
   setlocal noma nomod ro
   noremap <silent> <buffer> <cr> :call <SID>ZipBrowseSelect()<cr>
@@ -112,11 +121,14 @@ fun! s:ZipBrowseSelect()
   " get zipfile to the new-window
   let zipfile= substitute(w:zipfile,'.zip$','','e')
   let curfile= expand("%")
+"  call Decho("zipfile<".zipfile.">")
+"  call Decho("curfile<".curfile.">")
 
   new
   wincmd _
   let s:zipfile_{winnr()}= curfile
-  exe "e zipfile:".zipfile.':'.fname
+"  call Decho("exe e zipfile:".escape(zipfile,s:zipfile_escape).':'.escape(fname,s:zipfile_escape))
+  exe "e zipfile:".escape(zipfile,s:zipfile_escape).':'.escape(fname,s:zipfile_escape)
   filetype detect
 
   let &report= repkeep
@@ -130,11 +142,12 @@ fun! zip#Read(fname,mode)
   let repkeep= &report
   set report=10
 
-  let zipfile = substitute(a:fname,'zipfile:\(.\{-}\):.*$','\1','')
-  let fname   = substitute(a:fname,'zipfile:.\{-}:\(.*\)$','\1','')
+  let zipfile = substitute(a:fname,'zipfile:\(.\{-}\):[^\\].*$','\1','')
+  let fname   = substitute(a:fname,'zipfile:.\{-}:\([^\\].*\)$','\1','')
 "  call Decho("zipfile<".zipfile."> fname<".fname.">")
 
-  exe "r! unzip -p ".zipfile." ".fname
+"  call Decho("exe r! unzip -p '".zipfile."' '".fname."'")
+  exe "silent r! unzip -p '".zipfile."' '".fname."'"
 
   " cleanup
   0d
@@ -147,7 +160,7 @@ endfun
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " zip#Write: {{{2
 fun! zip#Write(fname)
-"  call Dfunc("zip#Write(fname<".a:fname.") zipfile_".winnr()."<".s:zipfile_{winnr()}.">")
+"  call Dfunc("zip#Write(fname<".a:fname.">) zipfile_".winnr()."<".s:zipfile_{winnr()}.">")
   let repkeep= &report
   set report=10
 
@@ -204,6 +217,7 @@ fun! zip#Write(fname)
    if executable("cygpath")
     let dirpath = substitute(system("cygpath ".dirpath),'\n','','e')
    endif
+"   call Decho("mkdir(dirpath<".dirpath.">,p)")
    call mkdir(dirpath,"p")
   endif
   if zipfile !~ '/'
@@ -211,13 +225,13 @@ fun! zip#Write(fname)
   endif
 "  call Decho("zipfile<".zipfile."> fname<".fname.">")
 
-  exe "w! ".fname
+  exe "w! ".escape(fname,s:zipfile_escape)
   if executable("cygpath")
    let zipfile = substitute(system("cygpath ".zipfile),'\n','','e')
   endif
 
-"  call Decho("zip -u ".zipfile.".zip ".fname)
-  call system("zip -u ".zipfile.".zip ".fname)
+"  call Decho("zip -u '".zipfile.".zip' '".fname."'")
+  call system("zip -u '".zipfile.".zip' '".fname."'")
   if v:shell_error != 0
    echohl Error | echo "***error*** (zip#Write) sorry, unable to update ".zipfile." with ".fname | echohl None
    call inputsave()|call input("Press <cr> to continue")|call inputrestore()

runtime/colors/delek.vim

@@ -1,57 +1,51 @@
 " Vim color file
 " Maintainer:	David Schweikert <dws@ee.ethz.ch>
-" Last Change:	2004 May 16
+" Last Change:	2006 Apr 14
 
-" First remove all existing highlighting.
 hi clear
 
 let colors_name = "delek"
 
-hi Normal guifg=Black guibg=white
+" Normal should come first
+hi Normal     guifg=Black  guibg=White
+hi Cursor     guifg=bg     guibg=fg
+hi lCursor    guifg=NONE   guibg=Cyan
 
-" Groups used in the 'highlight' and 'guicursor' options default value.
-hi ErrorMsg term=standout ctermbg=DarkRed ctermfg=White guibg=Red guifg=White
-hi IncSearch term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse
-hi ModeMsg term=bold cterm=bold gui=bold
-hi VertSplit term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse
-hi Visual term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse guifg=Grey guibg=fg
-hi VisualNOS term=underline,bold cterm=underline,bold gui=underline,bold
-hi DiffText term=reverse cterm=bold ctermbg=Red gui=bold guibg=Red
-hi Cursor guibg=Green guifg=NONE
-hi lCursor guibg=Cyan guifg=NONE
-hi Directory term=bold ctermfg=DarkBlue guifg=Blue
-hi LineNr term=underline ctermfg=Brown guifg=Brown
-hi MoreMsg term=bold ctermfg=DarkGreen gui=bold guifg=SeaGreen
-hi Question term=standout ctermfg=DarkGreen gui=bold guifg=SeaGreen
-hi Search term=reverse ctermbg=Yellow ctermfg=NONE guibg=Yellow guifg=NONE
-hi SpecialKey term=bold ctermfg=DarkBlue guifg=Blue
-hi Title term=bold ctermfg=DarkMagenta gui=bold guifg=Magenta
-hi WarningMsg term=standout ctermfg=DarkRed guifg=Red
-hi WildMenu term=standout ctermbg=Yellow ctermfg=Black guibg=Yellow guifg=Black
-hi Folded term=standout ctermbg=Grey ctermfg=DarkBlue guibg=LightGrey guifg=DarkBlue
-hi FoldColumn term=standout ctermbg=Grey ctermfg=DarkBlue guibg=Grey guifg=DarkBlue
-hi DiffAdd term=bold ctermbg=LightBlue guibg=LightBlue
-hi DiffChange term=bold ctermbg=LightMagenta guibg=LightMagenta
-hi DiffDelete term=bold ctermfg=Blue ctermbg=LightCyan gui=bold guifg=Blue guibg=LightCyan
-
-hi StatusLine	cterm=bold ctermbg=blue ctermfg=yellow guibg=gold guifg=blue
-hi StatusLineNC	cterm=bold ctermbg=blue ctermfg=black  guibg=gold guifg=blue
-hi NonText term=bold ctermfg=Blue gui=bold guifg=gray guibg=white
-hi Cursor guibg=fg guifg=bg
+" Note: we never set 'term' because the defaults for B&W terminals are OK
+hi DiffAdd    ctermbg=LightBlue    guibg=LightBlue
+hi DiffChange ctermbg=LightMagenta guibg=LightMagenta
+hi DiffDelete ctermfg=Blue         ctermbg=LightCyan gui=bold guifg=Blue guibg=LightCyan
+hi DiffText   ctermbg=Red          cterm=bold gui=bold guibg=Red
+hi Directory  ctermfg=DarkBlue     guifg=Blue
+hi ErrorMsg   ctermfg=White        ctermbg=DarkRed  guibg=Red       guifg=White
+hi FoldColumn ctermfg=DarkBlue     ctermbg=Grey     guibg=Grey      guifg=DarkBlue
+hi Folded     ctermbg=Grey         ctermfg=DarkBlue guibg=LightGrey guifg=DarkBlue
+hi IncSearch  cterm=reverse        gui=reverse
+hi LineNr     ctermfg=Brown        guifg=Brown
+hi ModeMsg    cterm=bold           gui=bold
+hi MoreMsg    ctermfg=DarkGreen    gui=bold guifg=SeaGreen
+hi NonText    ctermfg=Blue         gui=bold guifg=gray guibg=white
+hi Pmenu      guibg=LightBlue
+hi PmenuSel   ctermfg=White        ctermbg=DarkBlue  guifg=White  guibg=DarkBlue
+hi Question   ctermfg=DarkGreen    gui=bold guifg=SeaGreen
+hi Search     ctermfg=NONE         ctermbg=Yellow guibg=Yellow guifg=NONE
+hi SpecialKey ctermfg=DarkBlue     guifg=Blue
+hi StatusLine cterm=bold           ctermbg=blue ctermfg=yellow guibg=gold guifg=blue
+hi StatusLineNC	cterm=bold         ctermbg=blue ctermfg=black  guibg=gold guifg=blue
+hi Title      ctermfg=DarkMagenta  gui=bold guifg=Magenta
+hi VertSplit  cterm=reverse        gui=reverse
+hi Visual     ctermbg=NONE         cterm=reverse gui=reverse guifg=Grey guibg=fg
+hi VisualNOS  cterm=underline,bold gui=underline,bold
+hi WarningMsg ctermfg=DarkRed      guifg=Red
+hi WildMenu   ctermfg=Black        ctermbg=Yellow    guibg=Yellow guifg=Black
 
 " syntax highlighting
-hi PreProc    term=underline cterm=NONE ctermfg=darkmagenta  gui=NONE guifg=magenta3
-hi Identifier term=underline cterm=NONE ctermfg=darkcyan     gui=NONE guifg=cyan4
-hi Comment    term=NONE      cterm=NONE ctermfg=darkred      gui=NONE guifg=red2
-hi Constant   term=underline cterm=NONE ctermfg=darkgreen    gui=NONE guifg=green3
-hi Special    term=bold      cterm=NONE ctermfg=lightred     gui=NONE guifg=deeppink
-hi Statement  term=bold      cterm=bold ctermfg=blue	     gui=bold guifg=blue
-hi Type	      term=underline cterm=NONE ctermfg=blue	     gui=bold guifg=blue
-
-if exists("syntax_on")
-  let syntax_cmd = "enable"
-  runtime syntax/syncolor.vim
-  unlet syntax_cmd
-endif
+hi Comment    cterm=NONE ctermfg=DarkRed     gui=NONE guifg=red2
+hi Constant   cterm=NONE ctermfg=DarkGreen   gui=NONE guifg=green3
+hi Identifier cterm=NONE ctermfg=DarkCyan    gui=NONE guifg=cyan4
+hi PreProc    cterm=NONE ctermfg=DarkMagenta gui=NONE guifg=magenta3
+hi Special    cterm=NONE ctermfg=LightRed    gui=NONE guifg=deeppink
+hi Statement  cterm=bold ctermfg=Blue	     gui=bold guifg=blue
+hi Type	      cterm=NONE ctermfg=Blue	     gui=bold guifg=blue
 
 " vim: sw=2

runtime/colors/evening.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim color file
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2001 May 21
+" Last Change:	2006 Apr 14
 
 " This color scheme uses a dark grey background.
 
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ hi ModeMsg term=bold cterm=bold gui=bold
 hi StatusLine term=reverse,bold cterm=reverse,bold gui=reverse,bold
 hi StatusLineNC term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse
 hi VertSplit term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse
-hi Visual term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse guifg=Grey guibg=fg
+hi Visual term=reverse ctermbg=black guibg=grey60
 hi VisualNOS term=underline,bold cterm=underline,bold gui=underline,bold
 hi DiffText term=reverse cterm=bold ctermbg=Red gui=bold guibg=Red
 hi Cursor guibg=Green guifg=Black
@@ -42,6 +42,8 @@ hi FoldColumn term=standout ctermbg=LightGrey ctermfg=DarkBlue guibg=Grey guifg=
 hi DiffAdd term=bold ctermbg=DarkBlue guibg=DarkBlue
 hi DiffChange term=bold ctermbg=DarkMagenta guibg=DarkMagenta
 hi DiffDelete term=bold ctermfg=Blue ctermbg=DarkCyan gui=bold guifg=Blue guibg=DarkCyan
+hi CursorColumn term=reverse ctermbg=Black guibg=grey40
+hi CursorLine term=underline cterm=underline guibg=grey40
 
 " Groups for syntax highlighting
 hi Constant term=underline ctermfg=Magenta guifg=#ffa0a0 guibg=grey5

runtime/colors/koehler.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " vim: tw=0 ts=4 sw=4
 " Vim color file
 " Maintainer:	Ron Aaron <ron@ronware.org>
-" Last Change:	2003 May 02
+" Last Change:	2006 Mar 26
 
 hi clear
 set background=dark
@@ -37,6 +37,12 @@ hi PreProc		  term=underline  ctermfg=darkblue	guifg=#ff80ff
 hi Type			  term=underline  cterm=bold ctermfg=lightgreen  gui=bold  guifg=#60ff60
 hi Error		  term=reverse	ctermfg=darkcyan  ctermbg=black  guifg=Red	guibg=Black
 hi Todo			  term=standout  ctermfg=black	ctermbg=darkcyan  guifg=Blue  guibg=Yellow
+hi CursorLine	  term=underline  guibg=#555555
+hi CursorColumn	  term=underline  guibg=#555555
+hi MatchParen	  term=reverse  guibg=Blue
+hi TabLine		  term=bold,reverse  cterm=bold ctermfg=lightblue ctermbg=white gui=bold guifg=blue guibg=white
+hi TabLineFill	  term=bold,reverse  cterm=bold ctermfg=lightblue ctermbg=white gui=bold guifg=blue guibg=white
+hi TabLineSel	  term=reverse	ctermfg=white ctermbg=lightblue guifg=white guibg=blue
 hi link IncSearch		Visual
 hi link String			Constant
 hi link Character		Constant

runtime/colors/morning.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim color file
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2001 May 21
+" Last Change:	2006 Apr 15
 
 " This color scheme uses a light grey background.
 
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ hi ModeMsg term=bold cterm=bold gui=bold
 hi StatusLine term=reverse,bold cterm=reverse,bold gui=reverse,bold
 hi StatusLineNC term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse
 hi VertSplit term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse
-hi Visual term=reverse cterm=reverse gui=reverse guifg=Grey guibg=fg
+hi Visual term=reverse ctermbg=grey guibg=grey80
 hi VisualNOS term=underline,bold cterm=underline,bold gui=underline,bold
 hi DiffText term=reverse cterm=bold ctermbg=Red gui=bold guibg=Red
 hi Cursor guibg=Green guifg=NONE
@@ -42,6 +42,8 @@ hi FoldColumn term=standout ctermbg=Grey ctermfg=DarkBlue guibg=Grey guifg=DarkB
 hi DiffAdd term=bold ctermbg=LightBlue guibg=LightBlue
 hi DiffChange term=bold ctermbg=LightMagenta guibg=LightMagenta
 hi DiffDelete term=bold ctermfg=Blue ctermbg=LightCyan gui=bold guifg=Blue guibg=LightCyan
+hi CursorLine term=underline cterm=underline guibg=grey80
+hi CursorColumn term=reverse ctermbg=grey guibg=grey80
 
 " Colors for syntax highlighting
 hi Constant term=underline ctermfg=DarkRed guifg=Magenta guibg=grey95

runtime/colors/slate.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+"%% SiSU Vim color file
+" Slate Maintainer: Ralph Amissah <ralph@amissah.com>
+" (originally looked at desert Hans Fugal <hans@fugal.net> http://hans.fugal.net/vim/colors/desert.vim (2003/05/06 16:37:49)
+:set background=dark
+:highlight clear
+if version > 580
+ hi clear
+ if exists("syntax_on")
+ syntax reset
+ endif
+endif
+:hi Normal guifg=White guibg=grey15
+:hi Cursor guibg=khaki guifg=slategrey
+:hi VertSplit guibg=#c2bfa5 guifg=grey40 gui=none cterm=reverse
+:hi Folded guibg=black guifg=grey40 ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkgrey
+:hi FoldColumn guibg=black guifg=grey20 ctermfg=4 ctermbg=7
+:hi IncSearch guifg=green guibg=black cterm=none ctermfg=yellow ctermbg=green
+:hi ModeMsg guifg=goldenrod cterm=none ctermfg=brown
+:hi MoreMsg guifg=SeaGreen ctermfg=darkgreen
+:hi NonText guifg=RoyalBlue guibg=grey15 cterm=bold ctermfg=blue
+:hi Question guifg=springgreen ctermfg=green
+:hi Search guibg=peru guifg=wheat cterm=none ctermfg=grey ctermbg=blue
+:hi SpecialKey guifg=yellowgreen ctermfg=darkgreen
+:hi StatusLine guibg=#c2bfa5 guifg=black gui=none cterm=bold,reverse
+:hi StatusLineNC guibg=#c2bfa5 guifg=grey40 gui=none cterm=reverse
+:hi Title guifg=gold gui=bold cterm=bold ctermfg=yellow
+:hi Statement guifg=CornflowerBlue ctermfg=lightblue
+:hi Visual gui=none guifg=khaki guibg=olivedrab cterm=reverse
+:hi WarningMsg guifg=salmon ctermfg=1
+:hi String guifg=SkyBlue ctermfg=darkcyan
+:hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=11 guifg=grey40
+:hi Constant guifg=#ffa0a0 ctermfg=brown
+:hi Special guifg=green ctermfg=brown
+:hi Identifier guifg=salmon ctermfg=red
+:hi Include guifg=red ctermfg=red
+:hi PreProc guifg=red guibg=white ctermfg=red
+:hi Operator guifg=Red ctermfg=Red
+":hi Operator guifg=CornflowerBlue ctermfg=darkcyan
+:hi Define guifg=gold gui=bold ctermfg=yellow
+:hi Type guifg=darkkhaki ctermfg=2
+:hi Function guifg=navajowhite ctermfg=brown
+:hi LineNr guifg=grey50 ctermfg=3
+:hi Ignore guifg=grey40 cterm=bold ctermfg=7
+:hi Todo guifg=orangered guibg=yellow2
+:hi Directory ctermfg=darkcyan
+:hi ErrorMsg cterm=bold guifg=White guibg=Red cterm=bold ctermfg=7 ctermbg=1
+:hi VisualNOS cterm=bold,underline
+:hi WildMenu ctermfg=0 ctermbg=3
+:hi DiffAdd ctermbg=4
+:hi DiffChange ctermbg=5
+:hi DiffDelete cterm=bold ctermfg=4 ctermbg=6
+:hi DiffText cterm=bold ctermbg=1
+:hi Underlined cterm=underline ctermfg=5
+:hi Error guifg=White guibg=Red cterm=bold ctermfg=7 ctermbg=1
+:hi SpellErrors guifg=White guibg=Red cterm=bold ctermfg=7 ctermbg=1

runtime/compiler/eruby.vim

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 " Vim compiler file
-" Language:	eRuby
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2 at gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
-" Info:		$Id$
-" URL:		http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:	See above site
-" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+" Language:		eRuby
+" Maintainer:		Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
+" Info:			$Id$
+" URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
+" Anon CVS:		See above site
+" Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/compiler/ruby.vim

@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
 " Vim compiler file
-" Language:	Ruby
-" Function:	Syntax check and/or error reporting
-" Maintainer:	Tim Hammerquist <timh at rubyforge.org>
-" Info:		$Id$
-" URL:		http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:	See above site
+" Language:		Ruby
+" Function:		Syntax check and/or error reporting
+" Maintainer:		Tim Hammerquist <timh at rubyforge.org>
+" Info:			$Id$
+" URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
+" Anon CVS:		See above site
+" Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
 " ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 "
 " Changelog:

runtime/compiler/rubyunit.vim

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 " Vim compiler file
-" Language:	Test::Unit - Ruby Unit Testing Framework
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2 at gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
-" Info:		$Id$
-" URL:		http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:	See above site
-" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+" Language:		Test::Unit - Ruby Unit Testing Framework
+" Maintainer:		Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
+" Info:			$Id$
+" URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
+" Anon CVS:		See above site
+" Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	farsi.txt \
 	filetype.txt \
 	fold.txt \
+	getscript.txt \
 	gui.txt \
 	gui_w16.txt \
 	gui_w32.txt \
@@ -89,6 +90,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	sponsor.txt \
 	starting.txt \
 	spell.txt \
+	sql.txt \
 	syntax.txt \
 	tabpage.txt \
 	tagsrch.txt \
@@ -121,6 +123,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	usr_29.txt \
 	usr_30.txt \
 	usr_31.txt \
+	usr_32.txt \
 	usr_40.txt \
 	usr_41.txt \
 	usr_42.txt \
@@ -135,6 +138,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	version6.txt \
 	version7.txt \
 	vi_diff.txt \
+	vimball.txt \
 	visual.txt \
 	windows.txt \
 	workshop.txt
@@ -154,13 +158,13 @@ HTMLS = \
 	farsi.html \
 	filetype.html \
 	fold.html \
+	getscript.html \
 	gui.html \
 	gui_w16.html \
 	gui_w32.html \
 	gui_x11.html \
 	hangulin.html \
 	hebrew.html \
-	help.html \
 	howto.html \
 	if_cscop.html \
 	if_mzsch.html \
@@ -172,6 +176,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	if_tcl.html \
 	indent.html \
 	index.html \
+	vimindex.html \
 	insert.html \
 	intro.html \
 	map.html \
@@ -213,6 +218,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	sponsor.html \
 	starting.html \
 	spell.html \
+	sql.html \
 	syntax.html \
 	tabpage.html \
 	tagsrch.html \
@@ -246,6 +252,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	usr_29.html \
 	usr_30.html \
 	usr_31.html \
+	usr_32.html \
 	usr_40.html \
 	usr_41.html \
 	usr_42.html \
@@ -260,6 +267,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	version6.html \
 	version7.html \
 	vi_diff.html \
+	vimball.txt \
 	visual.html \
 	windows.html \
 	workshop.html
@@ -325,6 +333,14 @@ noerrors:
 .txt.html:
 	$(AWK) -f makehtml.awk $< >$@
 
+# index.html is the starting point for HTML, but for the help files it is
+# help.txt.  Therefore use vimindex.html for index.txt.
+index.html: help.txt
+	$(AWK) -f makehtml.awk help.txt >index.html
+
+vimindex.html: index.txt
+	$(AWK) -f makehtml.awk index.txt >vimindex.html
+
 tags.ref tags.html: tags
 	$(AWK) -f maketags.awk tags >tags.html
 
@@ -393,6 +409,8 @@ os_risc.txt:
 os_win32.txt:
 	touch os_win32.txt
 
+# Note that $< works with GNU make while $> works for BSD make.
+# Is there a solution that works for both??
 vim-fr.UTF-8.1: vim-fr.1
 	iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
 

runtime/doc/arabic.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*arabic.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*arabic.txt*	For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Nadim Shaikli

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 27
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -270,11 +270,17 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 
 	Various
 |FileChangedShell|	Vim notices that a file changed since editing started
+|FileChangedShellPost|	After handling a file changed since editing started
 |FileChangedRO|		before making the first change to a read-only file
 
+|ShellCmdPost|		after executing a shell command
+|ShellFilterPost|	after filtering with a shell command
+
 |FuncUndefined|		a user function is used but it isn't defined
 |SpellFileMissing|	a spell file is used but it can't be found
+|SourcePre|		before sourcing a Vim script
 
+|VimResized|		after the Vim window size changed
 |FocusGained|		Vim got input focus
 |FocusLost|		Vim lost input focus
 |CursorHold|		the user doesn't press a key for a while
@@ -500,10 +506,14 @@ FileChangedRO			Before making the first change to a read-only
 				the change was caused by an autocommand.
 				This event is triggered when making the first
 				change in a buffer or the first change after
-				'readonly' was set,
-				just before the change is applied to the text.
+				'readonly' was set, just before the change is
+				applied to the text.
 				WARNING: If the autocommand moves the cursor
 				the effect of the change is undefined.
+							*E788*
+				It is not allowed to change to another buffer
+				here.  You can reload the buffer but not edit
+				another one.
 							*FileChangedShell*
 FileChangedShell		When Vim notices that the modification time of
 				a file has changed since editing started.
@@ -533,6 +543,9 @@ FileChangedShell		When Vim notices that the modification time of
 				commands for the FileChangedShell event no
 				other FileChangedShell event will be
 				triggered.
+							*FileChangedShellPost*
+FileChangedShellPost		After handling a file that was changed outside
+				of Vim.  Can be used to update the statusline.
 							*FileEncoding*
 FileEncoding			Obsolete.  It still works and is equivalent
 				to |EncodingChanged|.
@@ -666,6 +679,16 @@ RemoteReply			When a reply from a Vim that functions as
 							*SessionLoadPost*
 SessionLoadPost			After loading the session file created using
 				the |:mksession| command.
+							*ShellCmdPost*
+ShellCmdPost			After executing a shell command with |:!cmd|,
+				|:shell|, |:make| and |:grep|.  Can be used to
+				check for any changed files.
+							*ShellFilterPost*
+ShellFilterPost			After executing a shell command with
+				":{range}!cmd", ":w !cmd" or ":r !cmd".
+				Can be used to check for any changed files.
+							*SourcePre*
+SourcePre			Before sourcing a Vim script. |:source|
 							*SpellFileMissing*
 SpellFileMissing		When trying to load a spell checking file and
 				it can't be found.  <amatch> is the language,
@@ -750,6 +773,10 @@ VimLeavePre			Before exiting Vim, just before writing the
 				Mostly useful with a "*" pattern. >
 	:autocmd VimLeavePre * call CleanupStuff()
 <				To detect an abnormal exit use |v:dying|.
+							*VimResized*
+VimResized			After the Vim window was resized, thus 'lines'
+				and/or 'columns' changed.  Not when starting
+				up though.
 							*WinEnter*
 WinEnter			After entering another window.  Not done for
 				the first window, when Vim has just started.

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 15
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -728,6 +728,7 @@ Examples: >
   :s/\([abc]\)\([efg]\)/\2\1/g	 modifies "af fa bg" to "fa fa gb"
   :s/abcde/abc^Mde/		 modifies "abcde"    to "abc", "de" (two lines)
   :s/$/\^M/			 modifies "abcde"    to "abcde^M"
+  :s/\w\+/\u\0/g		 modifies "bla bla"  to "Bla Bla"
 
 Note: In previous versions CTRL-V was handled in a special way.  Since this is
 not Vi compatible, this was removed.  Use a backslash instead.
@@ -765,6 +766,10 @@ break the line.
 For convenience a <NL> character is also used as a line break.  Prepend a
 backslash to get a real <NL> character (which will be a NUL in the file).
 
+When the result is a |List| then the items are joined with separating line
+breaks.  Thus each item becomes a line, except that they can contain line
+breaks themselves.
+
 The whole matched text can be accessed with "submatch(0)".  The text matched
 with the first pair of () with "submatch(1)".  Likewise for further
 sub-matches in ().
@@ -1503,7 +1508,7 @@ Vim has a sorting function and a sorting command.  The sorting function can be
 found here: |sort()|.
 
 							*:sor* *:sort*
-:[range]sor[t][!] [i][u][n][x][o] [/{pattern}/]
+:[range]sor[t][!] [i][u][r][n][x][o] [/{pattern}/]
 			Sort lines in [range].  When no range is given all
 			lines are sorted.
 
@@ -1512,24 +1517,25 @@ found here: |sort()|.
 			With [i] case is ignored.
 
 			With [n] sorting is done on the first decimal number
-			in the line (after a {pattern} match).
+			in the line (after or inside a {pattern} match).
 
 			With [x] sorting is done on the first hexadecimal
-			number in the line (after a {pattern} match).  A
-			leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.
+			number in the line (after or inside a {pattern}
+			match).  A leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.
 
 			With [o] sorting is done on the first octal number in
-			the line (after a {pattern} match).
+			the line (after or inside a {pattern} match).
 
 			With [u] only keep the first of a sequence of
 			identical lines (ignoring case when [i] is used).
+			Without this flag, a sequence of identical lines
+			will be kept in their original order.
 			Note that leading and trailing white space may cause
 			lines to be different.
 
-			When /{pattern}/ is specified the text matched with
-			{pattern} is skipped, so that you sort on what comes
-			after the match.  For lines without a match sorting
-			starts in the first column (e.g., for empty lines).
+			When /{pattern}/ is specified and there is no [r] flag
+			the text matched with {pattern} is skipped, so that
+			you sort on what comes after the match.
 			Instead of the slash any non-letter can be used.
 			For example, to sort on the second comma-separated
 			field: >
@@ -1537,7 +1543,24 @@ found here: |sort()|.
 <			To sort on the text at virtual column 10 (thus
 			ignoring the difference between tabs and spaces): >
 				:sort /.*\%10v/
-<
+<			To sort on the first number in the line, no matter
+			what is in front of it: >
+				:sort /.*\ze\d/
+
+<			With [r] sorting is done on the matching {pattern}
+			instead of skipping past it as described above.
+			For example, to sort on only the first three letters
+			of each line: >
+				:sort /\a\a\a/ r
+
+<			If a {pattern} is used, any lines which don't have a
+			match for {pattern} are kept in their current order,
+			but separate from the lines which do match {pattern}.
+			If you sorted in reverse, they will be in reverse
+			order after the sorted lines, otherwise they will be
+			in their original order, right before the sorted
+			lines.
+
 Note that using ":sort" with ":global" doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
 quite useless.
 
@@ -1545,8 +1568,8 @@ The details about sorting depend on the library function used.  There is no
 guarantee that sorting is "stable" or obeys the current locale.  You will have
 to try it out.
 
-The sorting itself cannot be interrupted, because of using a system library
-function.  You can interrupt the preparation (for undo) and putting the sorted
-lines into the buffer.  In the last case you may end up with duplicated lines.
+The sorting can be interrupted, but if you interrupt it too late in the
+process you may end up with duplicated lines.  This also depends on the system
+library function used.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 01
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -172,8 +172,11 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-A				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-A* *c_<C-R>_<C-A>*
 				'path' as in |gf|
 			CTRL-W	the Word under the cursor
 			CTRL-A	the WORD under the cursor; see |WORD|
-		When 'incsearch' is set the cursor position of the currently
-		displayed match is used.
+
+		When 'incsearch' is set the cursor position at the end of the
+		currently displayed match is used.  With CTRL-W the part of
+		the word that was already typed is not inserted again.
+
 		{not in Vi}
 		CTRL-F and CTRL-P: {only when +file_in_path feature is
 		included}
@@ -354,6 +357,7 @@ word before the cursor.  This is available for:
 - File names: Only after a command that accepts a file name or a setting for
   an option that can be set to a file name.  This is called file name
   completion.
+- Shell command names: After ":!cmd", ":r !cmd" and ":w !cmd".  $PATH is used.
 - Options: Only after the ":set" command.
 - Mappings: Only after a ":map" or similar command.
 - Variable and function names: Only after a ":if", ":call" or similar command.
@@ -398,6 +402,9 @@ CTRL-L		A match is done on the pattern in front of the cursor.  If
 		If there are multiple matches the longest common part is
 		inserted in place of the pattern.  If the result is shorter
 		than the pattern, no completion is done.
+		When 'incsearch' is set, entering a search pattern for "/" or
+		"?" and the current match is displayed then CTRL-L will add
+		one character from the end of the current match.
 
 The 'wildchar' option defaults to <Tab> (CTRL-E when in Vi compatible mode; in
 a previous version <Esc> was used).  In the pattern standard wildcards '*' and
@@ -742,8 +749,9 @@ Note: these are typed literally, they are not special keys!
 	<afile>    when executing autocommands, is replaced with the file name
 		   for a file read or write
 	<abuf>     when executing autocommands, is replaced with the currently
-		   effective buffer number (for ":r file" it is the current
-		   buffer, the file being read is not in a buffer).
+		   effective buffer number (for ":r file" and ":so file" it is
+		   the current buffer, the file being read/sourced is not in a
+		   buffer).
 	<amatch>   when executing autocommands, is replaced with the match for
 		   which this autocommand was executed.  It differs from
 		   <afile> only when the file name isn't used to match with
@@ -970,6 +978,11 @@ that there will be an extra screen redraw.
 The buffer used for the command-line window is deleted.  Any changes to lines
 other than the one that is executed with <CR> are lost.
 
+If you would like to execute the command under the cursor and then have the
+command-line window open again, you may find this mapping useful: >
+
+	:map <F5> <CR>q:
+
 
 VARIOUS
 

runtime/doc/debug.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Dec 17
+*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Dec 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/debugger.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Jan 12
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -149,6 +149,7 @@ VIM IS... NOT						*design-not*
   A satirical way to say this: "Unlike Emacs, Vim does not attempt to include
   everything but the kitchen sink, but some people say that you can clean one
   with it.  ;-)"
+  To use Vim with gdb see: http://www.agide.org and http://clewn.sf.net.
 - Vim is not a fancy GUI editor that tries to look nice at the cost of
   being less consistent over all platforms.  But functional GUI features are
   welcomed.
@@ -187,8 +188,8 @@ strchr()	vim_strchr()	Accepts special characters
 strrchr()	vim_strrchr()	Accepts special characters
 isspace()	vim_isspace()	Can handle characters > 128
 iswhite()	vim_iswhite()	Only TRUE for Tab and space
-memcpy()	vim_memmove()	Handles overlapped copies
-bcopy()		vim_memmove()	Handles overlapped copies
+memcpy()	mch_memmove()	Handles overlapped copies
+bcopy()		mch_memmove()	Handles overlapped copies
 memset()	vim_memset()	Uniform for all systems
 
 

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 18
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -51,6 +51,8 @@ splits add the |-o| argument: >
 
 	vimdiff -o file1 file2 [file3]
 
+If you always prefer horizontal splits include "horizontal" in 'diffopt'.
+
 In each of the edited files these options are set:
 
 	'diff'		on
@@ -58,7 +60,7 @@ In each of the edited files these options are set:
 	'scrollopt'	includes "hor"
 	'wrap'		off
 	'foldmethod'	"diff"
-	'foldcolumn'	2
+	'foldcolumn'	value from 'diffopt', default is 2
 
 These options are set local to the window.  When editing another file they are
 reset to the global value.
@@ -107,7 +109,9 @@ To make these commands use a vertical split, prepend |:vertical|.  Examples: >
 
 	:vert diffsplit main.c~
 	:vert diffpatch /tmp/diff
-<
+
+If you always prefer a vertical split include "vertical" in 'diffopt'.
+
 							*E96*
 There can be up to four buffers with 'diff' set.
 
@@ -202,7 +206,8 @@ The diffs are highlighted with these groups:
 				(searching from the end of the line).  The
 				text in between is highlighted.  This means
 				that parts in the middle that are still the
-				same are highlighted anyway.
+				same are highlighted anyway.  Only "iwhite" of
+				'diffopt' is used here.
 |hl-DiffDelete| DiffDelete	Deleted lines.  Also called filler lines,
 				because they don't really exist in this
 				buffer.
@@ -268,6 +273,10 @@ buffer: >
 Note that deleted lines are displayed, but not counted as text lines.  You
 can't move the cursor into them.  To fill the deleted lines with the lines
 from another buffer use ":diffget" on the line below them.
+								*E787*
+When the buffer that is about to be modified is read-only and the autocommand
+that is triggered by |FileChangedRO| changes buffers the command will fail.
+The autocommand must not change buffers.
 
 The [bufspec] argument above can be a buffer number, a pattern for a buffer
 name or a part of a buffer name.  Examples:
@@ -378,8 +387,8 @@ will have the same effect.  These variables are set to the file names used:
 
 Example (this does the same as 'patchexpr' being empty): >
 
-	let patchexpr=MyPatch
-	function MyPatch
+	set patchexpr=MyPatch()
+	function MyPatch()
 	   :call system("patch -o " . v:fname_out . " " . v:fname_in .
 	   \  " < " . v:fname_diff)
 	endfunction

runtime/doc/digraph.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Sep 11
+*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Sep 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 24
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -313,6 +313,8 @@ CTRL-^			Edit the alternate file (equivalent to ":e #").
 			in the 'path' is edited.
 			This command fails if Vim refuses to |abandon| the
 			current file.
+			If you want to edit the file in a new window use
+			|CTRL-W_CTRL-F|.
 			If you do want to edit a new file, use: >
 				:e <cfile>
 <			To make gf always work like that: >
@@ -414,20 +416,26 @@ You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of an
 external command, by using the syntax `={expr}` e.g.: >
 	:e `=tempname()`
 The expression can contain just about anything, thus this can also be used to
-avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.
+avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  Names are to be separated
+with line breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a
+name.  Line breaks also separate names.
 
 							*++opt* *[++opt]*
 The [++opt] argument can be used to force the value of 'fileformat',
 'fileencoding' or 'binary' to a value for one command, and to specify the
 behavior for bad characters.  The form is: >
+	++{optname}
+Or: >
 	++{optname}={value}
 
-Where {optname} is one of:		*++ff* *++enc* *++bin* *++nobin*
+Where {optname} is one of:	    *++ff* *++enc* *++bin* *++nobin* *++edit*
     ff     or  fileformat   overrides 'fileformat'
     enc    or  encoding	    overrides 'fileencoding'
     bin    or  binary	    sets 'binary'
     nobin  or  nobinary	    resets 'binary'
     bad                     specifies behavior for bad characters
+    edit		    for |:read| only: keep option values as if editing
+    			    a file
 
 {value} cannot contain white space.  It can be any valid value for these
 options.  Examples: >
@@ -895,6 +903,7 @@ used, for example, when the write fails and you want to try again later with
 			The [!] is needed to overwrite an existing file.
 			When 'filetype' is empty filetype detection is done
 			with the new name, before the file is written.
+			When the write was successful 'readonly' is reset.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:up* *:update*

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 28
+*eval.txt*      For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -77,6 +77,10 @@ the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero.  Examples: >
 
 To force conversion from String to Number, add zero to it: >
 	:echo "0100" + 0
+<	64 ~
+
+To avoid a leading zero to cause octal conversion, or for using a different
+base, use |str2nr()|.
 
 For boolean operators Numbers are used.  Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE.
 
@@ -106,8 +110,8 @@ around the arguments, to invoke the function it refers to.  Example: >
 	:let Fn = function("MyFunc")
 	:echo Fn()
 <							*E704* *E705* *E707*
-A Funcref variable must start with a capital, "s:", "w:" or "b:".  You cannot
-have both a Funcref variable and a function with the same name.
+A Funcref variable must start with a capital, "s:", "w:", "t:" or "b:".  You
+cannot have both a Funcref variable and a function with the same name.
 
 A special case is defining a function and directly assigning its Funcref to a
 Dictionary entry.  Example: >
@@ -194,6 +198,11 @@ available. >
 	:let shortlist = mylist[2:2]	" List with one item: [3]
 	:let otherlist = mylist[:]	" make a copy of the List
 
+If the second index is equal to or greater than the length of the list there
+is no error and the length minus one is used: >
+	:let mylist = [0, 1, 2, 3]
+	:echo mylist[2:8]		" result: [2, 3]
+
 The second index can be just before the first index.  In that case the result
 is an empty list.  If the second index is lower, this results in an error. >
 	:echo mylist[2:1]		" result: []
@@ -500,7 +509,7 @@ the function was invoked from.
 It is also possible to add a function without the "dict" attribute as a
 Funcref to a Dictionary, but the "self" variable is not available then.
 
-						*numbered-function*
+				*numbered-function* *anonymous-function*
 To avoid the extra name for the function it can be defined and directly
 assigned to a Dictionary in this way: >
 	:let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]}
@@ -815,7 +824,7 @@ Number.  Note that this doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings.
 Index zero gives the first character.  This is like it works in C.  Careful:
 text column numbers start with one!  Example, to get the character under the
 cursor: >
-	:let c = getline(line("."))[col(".") - 1]
+	:let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
 
 If the length of the String is less than the index, the result is an empty
 String.  A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backwards
@@ -1026,6 +1035,7 @@ specified by what is prepended:
 		(nothing) In a function: local to a function; otherwise: global
 |buffer-variable|    b:	  Local to the current buffer.
 |window-variable|    w:	  Local to the current window.
+|tabpage-variable|   t:	  Local to the current tab page.
 |global-variable|    g:	  Global.
 |local-variable|     l:	  Local to a function.
 |script-variable|    s:	  Local to a |:source|'ed Vim script.
@@ -1059,6 +1069,11 @@ b:changedtick	The total number of changes to the current buffer.  It is
 A variable name that is preceded with "w:" is local to the current window.  It
 is deleted when the window is closed.
 
+						*tabpage-variable* *t:var*
+A variable name that is preceded with "t:" is local to the current tab page,
+It is deleted when the tab page is closed. {not available when compiled
+without the +windows feature}
+
 						*global-variable* *g:var*
 Inside functions global variables are accessed with "g:".  Omitting this will
 access a variable local to a function.  But "g:" can also be used in any other
@@ -1429,6 +1444,7 @@ v:swapcommand	Normal mode command to be executed after a file has been
 		opened.  Can be used for a |SwapExists| autocommand to have
 		another Vim open the file and jump to the right place.  For
 		example, when jumping to a tag the value is ":tag tagname\r".
+		For ":edit +cmd file" the value is ":cmd\r".
 
 				*v:termresponse* *termresponse-variable*
 v:termresponse	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RV|
@@ -1496,6 +1512,7 @@ append( {lnum}, {list})		Number	append lines {list} below line {lnum}
 argc()				Number	number of files in the argument list
 argidx()			Number	current index in the argument list
 argv( {nr})			String	{nr} entry of the argument list
+argv( )				List	the argument list
 browse( {save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
 				String	put up a file requester
 browsedir( {title}, {initdir})  String	put up a directory requester
@@ -1509,9 +1526,11 @@ byte2line( {byte})		Number	line number at byte count {byte}
 byteidx( {expr}, {nr})		Number	byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
 call( {func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
 				any	call {func} with arguments {arglist}
+changenr()			Number  current change number
 char2nr( {expr})		Number	ASCII value of first char in {expr}
 cindent( {lnum})		Number	C indent for line {lnum}
 col( {expr})			Number	column nr of cursor or mark
+complete({startcol}, {matches})	String  set Insert mode completion
 complete_add( {expr})		Number	add completion match
 complete_check()		Number  check for key typed during completion
 confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
@@ -1521,7 +1540,9 @@ count( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
 				Number	 count how many {expr} are in {list}
 cscope_connection( [{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
 				Number	checks existence of cscope connection
-cursor( {lnum}, {col})		Number	position cursor at {lnum}, {col}
+cursor( {lnum}, {col} [, {coladd}])
+				Number	move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {coladd}
+cursor( {list})			Number	move cursor to position in {list}
 deepcopy( {expr})		any	make a full copy of {expr}
 delete( {fname})		Number	delete file {fname}
 did_filetype()			Number	TRUE if FileType autocommand event used
@@ -1533,29 +1554,33 @@ eval( {string})			any	evaluate {string} into its value
 eventhandler( )			Number	TRUE if inside an event handler
 executable( {expr})		Number	1 if executable {expr} exists
 exists( {expr})			Number	TRUE if {expr} exists
+extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
+				List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
 expand( {expr})			String	expand special keywords in {expr}
 filereadable( {file})		Number	TRUE if {file} is a readable file
+filewritable( {file})		Number	TRUE if {file} is a writable file
 filter( {expr}, {string})	List/Dict  remove items from {expr} where
 					{string} is 0
 finddir( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]])
-				String	Find directory {name} in {path}
+				String	find directory {name} in {path}
 findfile( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]])
-				String	Find file {name} in {path}
-filewritable( {file})		Number	TRUE if {file} is a writable file
+				String	find file {name} in {path}
 fnamemodify( {fname}, {mods})	String	modify file name
 foldclosed( {lnum})		Number	first line of fold at {lnum} if closed
 foldclosedend( {lnum})		Number	last line of fold at {lnum} if closed
 foldlevel( {lnum})		Number	fold level at {lnum}
 foldtext( )			String	line displayed for closed fold
+foldtextresult( {lnum})		String	text for closed fold at {lnum}
 foreground( )			Number	bring the Vim window to the foreground
 function( {name})		Funcref reference to function {name}
+garbagecollect()		none	free memory, breaking cyclic references
 get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}])	any	get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
 get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}])	any	get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
 getbufline( {expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
 				List	lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {expr}
+getbufvar( {expr}, {varname})	any	variable {varname} in buffer {expr}
 getchar( [expr])		Number	get one character from the user
 getcharmod( )			Number	modifiers for the last typed character
-getbufvar( {expr}, {varname})		variable {varname} in buffer {expr}
 getcmdline()			String	return the current command-line
 getcmdpos()			Number	return cursor position in command-line
 getcmdtype()			String	return the current command-line type
@@ -1568,17 +1593,21 @@ getftype( {fname})		String	description of type of file {fname}
 getline( {lnum})		String	line {lnum} of current buffer
 getline( {lnum}, {end})		List	lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer
 getloclist({nr})		List	list of location list items
+getpos( {expr})			List	position of cursor, mark, etc.
 getqflist()			List	list of quickfix items
 getreg( [{regname} [, 1]])	String	contents of register
 getregtype( [{regname}])	String	type of register
+gettabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {name})
+				any	{name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}
 getwinposx()			Number	X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
 getwinposy()			Number	Y coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
-getwinvar( {nr}, {varname})		variable {varname} in window {nr}
+getwinvar( {nr}, {varname})	any	variable {varname} in window {nr}
 glob( {expr})			String	expand file wildcards in {expr}
 globpath( {path}, {expr})	String	do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
 has( {feature})			Number	TRUE if feature {feature} supported
 has_key( {dict}, {key})		Number	TRUE if {dict} has entry {key}
-hasmapto( {what} [, {mode}])	Number	TRUE if mapping to {what} exists
+hasmapto( {what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+				Number	TRUE if mapping to {what} exists
 histadd( {history},{item})	String	add an item to a history
 histdel( {history} [, {item}])	String	remove an item from a history
 histget( {history} [, {index}])	String	get the item {index} from a history
@@ -1593,6 +1622,7 @@ index( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
 input( {prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
 				String	get input from the user
 inputdialog( {p} [, {t} [, {c}]]) String  like input() but in a GUI dialog
+inputlist( {textlist})		Number	let the user pick from a choice list
 inputrestore()			Number	restore typeahead
 inputsave()			Number	save and clear typeahead
 inputsecret( {prompt} [, {text}]) String  like input() but hiding the text
@@ -1610,10 +1640,13 @@ line2byte( {lnum})		Number	byte count of line {lnum}
 lispindent( {lnum})		Number	Lisp indent for line {lnum}
 localtime()			Number	current time
 map( {expr}, {string})		List/Dict  change each item in {expr} to {expr}
-maparg( {name}[, {mode}])	String	rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
-mapcheck( {name}[, {mode}])	String	check for mappings matching {name}
+maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+				String	rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
+mapcheck( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+				String	check for mappings matching {name}
 match( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
 				Number	position where {pat} matches in {expr}
+matcharg( {nr})			List	arguments of |:match|
 matchend( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
 				Number	position where {pat} ends in {expr}
 matchlist( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
@@ -1627,6 +1660,7 @@ mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
 mode()				String	current editing mode
 nextnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
 nr2char( {expr})		String	single char with ASCII value {expr}
+pathshorten( {expr})		String	shorten directory names in a path
 prevnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
 printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...)	String  format text
 pumvisible()			Number  whether popup menu is visible
@@ -1634,6 +1668,8 @@ range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
 				List	items from {expr} to {max}
 readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
 				List	get list of lines from file {fname}
+reltime( [{start} [, {end}]])	List	get time value
+reltimestr( {time})		String	turn time value into a String
 remote_expr( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
 				String	send expression
 remote_foreground( {server})	Number	bring Vim server to the foreground
@@ -1665,8 +1701,11 @@ setcmdpos( {pos})		Number	set cursor position in command-line
 setline( {lnum}, {line})	Number	set line {lnum} to {line}
 setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}])
 				Number	modify location list using {list}
+setpos( {expr}, {list})		none	set the {expr} position to {list}
 setqflist( {list}[, {action}])	Number	modify quickfix list using {list}
 setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}])	Number	set register to value and type
+settabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})    set {varname} in window
+					{winnr} in tab page {tabnr} to {val}
 setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
 simplify( {filename})		String	simplify filename as much as possible
 sort( {list} [, {func}])	List	sort {list}, using {func} to compare
@@ -1676,6 +1715,7 @@ spellsuggest( {word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
 				List	spelling suggestions
 split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
 				List	make |List| from {pat} separated {expr}
+str2nr( {expr} [, {base}])	Number	convert string to number
 strftime( {format}[, {time}])	String	time in specified format
 stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}])
 				Number	index of {needle} in {haystack}
@@ -1715,6 +1755,8 @@ winheight( {nr})		Number	height of window {nr}
 winline()			Number	window line of the cursor
 winnr( [{expr}])		Number	number of current window
 winrestcmd()			String	returns command to restore window sizes
+winrestview({dict})		None	restore view of current window
+winsaveview()			Dict	save view of current window
 winwidth( {nr})			Number	width of window {nr}
 writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
 				Number	write list of lines to file {fname}
@@ -1749,7 +1791,7 @@ argidx()	The result is the current index in the argument list.  0 is
 		the first file.  argc() - 1 is the last one.  See |arglist|.
 
 							*argv()*
-argv({nr})	The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
+argv([{nr}])	The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
 		current window.  See |arglist|.  "argv(0)" is the first one.
 		Example: >
 	:let i = 0
@@ -1758,7 +1800,9 @@ argv({nr})	The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
 	:  exe 'amenu Arg.' . f . ' :e ' . f . '<CR>'
 	:  let i = i + 1
 	:endwhile
-<
+<		Without the {nr} argument a |List| with the whole |arglist| is
+		returned.
+
 							*browse()*
 browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
 		Put up a file requester.  This only works when "has("browse")"
@@ -1842,9 +1886,13 @@ bufname({expr})						*bufname()*
 		Obsolete name: buffer_name().
 
 							*bufnr()*
-bufnr({expr})	The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by
+bufnr({expr} [, {create}])
+		The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by
 		the ":ls" command.  For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()|
-		above.  If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+		above.
+		If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned.  Or, if the
+		{create} argument is present and not zero, a new, unlisted,
+		buffer is created and its number is returned.
 		bufnr("$") is the last buffer: >
 	:let last_buffer = bufnr("$")
 <		The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number
@@ -1903,6 +1951,14 @@ call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])			*call()* *E699*
 		{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute.  It will be
 		used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
 
+changenr()						*changenr()*
+		Return the number of the most recent change.  This is the same
+		number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used
+		with the |:undo| command.
+		When a change was made it is the number of that change.  After
+		redo it is the number of the redone change.  After undo it is
+		one less than the number of the undone change.
+
 char2nr({expr})						*char2nr()*
 		Return number value of the first char in {expr}.  Examples: >
 			char2nr(" ")		returns 32
@@ -1929,6 +1985,8 @@ col({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
 			    number of characters in the cursor line plus one)
 		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
 			    returned)
+		To get the line number use |col()|.  To get both use
+		|getpos()|.
 		For the screen column position use |virtcol()|.
 		Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
 		Examples: >
@@ -1946,12 +2004,43 @@ col({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
 				\let &ve = save_ve<CR>
 <
 
+complete({startcol}, {matches})			*complete()* *E785*
+		Set the matches for Insert mode completion.
+		Can only be used in Insert mode.  You need to use a mapping
+		with an expression argument |:map-<expr>| or CTRL-R =
+		|i_CTRL-R|.  It does not work after CTRL-O.
+		{startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed
+		text start.  The text up to the cursor is the original text
+		that will be replaced by the matches.  Use col('.') for an
+		empty string.  "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a
+		match.
+		{matches} must be a |List|.  Each |List| item is one match.
+		See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible.
+		Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid
+		inserting anything that would completion to stop.
+		The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with
+		Insert mode completion.  The popup menu will appear if
+		specified, see |ins-completion-menu|.
+		Example: >
+	inoremap <expr> <F5> ListMonths()
+
+	func! ListMonths()
+	  call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March',
+		\ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September',
+		\ 'October', 'November', 'December'])
+	  return ''
+	endfunc
+<		This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works.  Note that
+		an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted.
+
 complete_add({expr})				*complete_add()*
 		Add {expr} to the list of matches.  Only to be used by the
 		function specified with the 'completefunc' option.
 		Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory),
 		1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in
 		the list.
+		See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}.  It is
+		the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return.
 
 complete_check()				*complete_check()*
 		Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches.
@@ -2068,9 +2157,13 @@ cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
 		cscope_connection(4, "out", "local")			0
 		cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local")	1
 <
-cursor({lnum}, {col})					*cursor()*
+cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])				*cursor()*
+cursor({list})
 		Positions the cursor at the column {col} in the line {lnum}.
 		The first column is one.
+		When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List|
+		with two or three items {lnum}, {col} and {off}.  This is like
+		the return value of |getpos()|, but without the first item.
 		Does not change the jumplist.
 		If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
 		the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer.
@@ -2079,6 +2172,9 @@ cursor({lnum}, {col})					*cursor()*
 		the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the
 		line.
 		If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column.
+		When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in
+		screen columns from the start of the character.  E.g., a
+		position within a Tab or after the last character.
 
 
 deepcopy({expr}[, {noref}])				*deepcopy()* *E698*
@@ -2179,6 +2275,9 @@ executable({expr})					*executable()*
 		extension.
 		On MS-DOS and MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and
 		is not a directory, not if it's really executable.
+		On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is
+		always found.  Since this directory is added to $PATH it
+		should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|.
 		The result is a Number:
 			1	exists
 			0	does not exist
@@ -2394,21 +2493,24 @@ filter({expr}, {string})					*filter()*
 
 
 finddir({name}[, {path}[, {count}]])				*finddir()*
-		Find directory {name} in {path}.
+		Find directory {name} in {path}.  Returns the path of the
+		first found match.  When the found directory is below the
+		current directory a relative path is returned.  Otherwise a
+		full path is returned.
 		If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used.
 		If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of
-		{name} in {path}.
+		{name} in {path} instead of the first one.
+		When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|.
 		This is quite similar to the ex-command |:find|.
-		When the found directory is below the current directory a
-		relative path is returned.  Otherwise a full path is returned.
-		Example: >
-			:echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;")
-<		Searches from the current directory upwards until it finds
-		the file "tags.vim".
 		{only available when compiled with the +file_in_path feature}
 
 findfile({name}[, {path}[, {count}]])				*findfile()*
 		Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory.
+		Uses 'suffixesadd'.
+		Example: >
+			:echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;")
+<		Searches from the current directory upwards until it finds
+		the file "tags.vim".
 
 filewritable({file})					*filewritable()*
 		The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the
@@ -2643,11 +2745,11 @@ getfontname([{name}])					*getfontname()*
 		font name.  If not then an empty string is returned.
 		Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the
 		GUI does not support obtaining the real name.
-		Only works when the GUI is running, thus not you your vimrc or
-		Note that the GTK 2 GUI accepts any font name, thus checking
-		for a valid name does not work.
+		Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or
 		gvimrc file.  Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this
 		function just after the GUI has started.
+		Note that the GTK 2 GUI accepts any font name, thus checking
+		for a valid name does not work.
 
 getfperm({fname})					*getfperm()*
 		The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute
@@ -2767,6 +2869,20 @@ getregtype([{regname}])					*getregtype()*
 		<CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
 		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
 
+gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname})		*gettabwinvar()*
+		Get the value of an option or local window variable {varname}
+		in window {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}.
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.  For the current tabpage
+		use |getwinvar()|.
+		When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
+		This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
+		window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
+		or buffer-local variable.
+		Note that the name without "w:" must be used.
+		Examples: >
+			:let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list')
+			:echo "myvar = " . gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar')
+
 							*getwinposx()*
 getwinposx()	The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of
 		the left hand side of the GUI Vim window.  The result will be
@@ -2777,14 +2893,8 @@ getwinposy()	The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of
 		the top of the GUI Vim window.  The result will be -1 if the
 		information is not available.
 
-getwinvar({nr}, {varname})				*getwinvar()*
-		The result is the value of option or local window variable
-		{varname} in window {nr}.  When {nr} is zero the current
-		window is used.
-		This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
-		window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
-		or buffer-local variable.
-		Note that the name without "w:" must be used.
+getwinvar({winnr}, {varname})				*getwinvar()*
+		Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage.
 		Examples: >
 			:let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
 			:echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
@@ -2838,11 +2948,14 @@ has_key({dict}, {key})					*has_key()*
 		an entry with key {key}.  Zero otherwise.
 
 
-hasmapto({what} [, {mode}])				*hasmapto()*
+hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*hasmapto()*
 		The result is a Number, which is 1 if there is a mapping that
 		contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is mapped to)
 		and this mapping exists in one of the modes indicated by
 		{mode}.
+		When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.  Don't forget to specify Insert and/or
+		Command-line mode.
 		Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current
 		buffer are checked for a match.
 		If no matching mapping is found 0 is returned.
@@ -3058,9 +3171,9 @@ inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]])		*inputdialog()*
 		NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
 
 inputlist({textlist})					*inputlist()*
-		{textlist} must be a list of strings.  This list is displayed,
-		one string per line.  The user will be prompted to enter a
-		number, which is returned.
+		{textlist} must be a |List| of strings.  This |List| is
+		displayed, one string per line.  The user will be prompted to
+		enter a number, which is returned.
 		The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the
 		mouse.  For the first string 0 is returned.  When clicking
 		above the first item a negative number is returned.  When
@@ -3117,7 +3230,7 @@ isdirectory({directory})				*isdirectory()*
 		exist, or isn't a directory, the result is FALSE.  {directory}
 		is any expression, which is used as a String.
 
-islocked({expr})					*islocked()*
+islocked({expr})					*islocked()* *E786*
 		The result is a Number, which is non-zero when {expr} is the
 		name of a locked variable.
 		{expr} must be the name of a variable, |List| item or
@@ -3228,7 +3341,9 @@ line({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file
 			    returned)
 		    w0	    first line visible in current window
 		    w$	    last line visible in current window
-		Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
+		Note that a mark in another file can be used.
+		To get the column number use |col()|.  To get both use
+		|getpos()|.
 		Examples: >
 			line(".")		line number of the cursor
 			line("'t")		line number of mark t
@@ -3288,7 +3403,7 @@ map({expr}, {string})					*map()*
 		further items in {expr} are processed.
 
 
-maparg({name}[, {mode}])				*maparg()*
+maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*maparg()*
 		Return the rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}.  When there
 		is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is returned.
 		{mode} can be one of these strings:
@@ -3300,6 +3415,8 @@ maparg({name}[, {mode}])				*maparg()*
 			"l"	langmap |language-mapping|
 			""	Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
 		When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
+		When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.
 		The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
 		command.  The returned String has special characters
 		translated like in the output of the ":map" command listing.
@@ -3310,10 +3427,12 @@ maparg({name}[, {mode}])				*maparg()*
 			exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' . maparg('<Tab>', 'n')
 
 
-mapcheck({name}[, {mode}])				*mapcheck()*
+mapcheck({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*mapcheck()*
 		Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode
 		{mode}.  See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in
 		{name}.
+		When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.
 		A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and
 		with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}.
 
@@ -3351,7 +3470,7 @@ match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])			*match()*
 		If there is no match -1 is returned.
 		Example: >
 			:echo match("testing", "ing")	" results in 4
-			:echo match([1, 'x'], '\a')	" results in 2
+			:echo match([1, 'x'], '\a')	" results in 1
 <		See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
 								*strpbrk()*
 		Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function.  But you can do: >
@@ -3372,7 +3491,10 @@ match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])			*match()*
 			:echo match("testing", "t", 2)
 <		result is "3".
 		For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts
-		{start} bytes later, thus "^" will match there.
+		{start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}.  Except
+		when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the
+		{start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it
+		backwards compatible).
 		For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0.  For a list
 		the index is counted from the end.
 		If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a
@@ -3383,12 +3505,26 @@ match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])			*match()*
 		character further.  Thus this example results in 1: >
 			echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2)
 <		In a |List| the search continues in the next item.
+		Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes,
+		see above.
 
 		See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted.
 		The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of
 		the pattern.  'smartcase' is NOT used.  The matching is always
 		done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty.
 
+
+matcharg({nr})							*matcharg()*
+		Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|, 
+		|:2match| or |:3match| command.
+		Return a |List| with two elements:
+			The name of the highlight group used
+			The pattern used.
+		When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|.
+		When there is no match item set returns ['', ''].
+		This is usef to save and restore a |:match|.
+
+
 matchend({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])			*matchend()*
 		Same as match(), but return the index of first character after
 		the match.  Example: >
@@ -3489,6 +3625,34 @@ nr2char({expr})						*nr2char()*
 		characters.  nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
 		string, thus results in an empty string.
 
+							*getpos()*
+getpos({expr})	Get the position for {expr}.  For possible values of {expr}
+		see |line()|.
+		The result is a |List| with four numbers:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+		"bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
+		is the buffer number of the mark.
+		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
+		column is 1.
+		The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used.  Then
+		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a Tab or after the last
+		character.
+		This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
+			let save_cursor = getpos(".")
+			MoveTheCursorAround
+			call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+<		Also see |setpos()|.
+
+pathshorten({expr})					*pathshorten()*
+		Shorten directory names in the path {expr} and return the
+		result.  The tail, the file name, is kept as-is.  The other
+		components in the path are reduced to single letters.  Leading
+		'~' and '.' characters are kept.  Example: >
+			:echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim')
+<			~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~
+		It doesn't matter if the path exists or not.
+
 prevnonblank({lnum})					*prevnonblank()*
 		Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum}
 		that is not blank.  Example: >
@@ -3628,7 +3792,8 @@ printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
 pumvisible()						*pumvisible()*
 		Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero
 		otherwise.  See |ins-completion-menu|.
-
+		This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
+		popup menu.
 
 							*E726* *E727*
 range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])				*range()*
@@ -3679,10 +3844,38 @@ readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
 		the result is an empty list.
 		Also see |writefile()|.
 
+reltime([{start} [, {end}]])				*reltime()*
+		Return an item that represents a time value.  The format of
+		the item depends on the system.  It can be passed to
+		|reltimestr()| to convert it to a string.
+		Without an argument it returns the current time.
+		With one argument is returns the time passed since the time
+		specified in the argument.
+		With two arguments it returns the time passed betweein {start}
+		and {end}.
+		The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by
+		reltime().
+		{only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
+
+reltimestr({time})				*reltimestr()*
+		Return a String that represents the time value of {time}.
+		This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of
+		microseconds.  Example: >
+			let start = reltime()
+			call MyFunction()
+			echo reltimestr(reltime(start))
+<		Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time.
+		The accuracy depends on the system.
+		Also see |profiling|.
+		{only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
+
 							*remote_expr()* *E449*
 remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
 		Send the {string} to {server}.  The string is sent as an
 		expression and the result is returned after evaluation.
+		The result must be a String or a |List|.  A |List| is turned
+		into a String by joining the items with a line break in
+		between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n").
 		If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a
 		variable and a {serverid} for later use with
 		remote_read() is stored there.
@@ -3813,13 +4006,16 @@ reverse({list})	Reverse the order of items in {list} in-place.  Returns
 search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline}]])			*search()*
 		Search for regexp pattern {pattern}.  The search starts at the
 		cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).
+
 		{flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
 		'b'	search backward instead of forward
+		'c'     accept a match at the cursor position
+		'e'	move to the End of the match
 		'n'	do Not move the cursor
+		'p'	return number of matching sub-pattern (see below)
+		's'	set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
 		'w'	wrap around the end of the file
 		'W'	don't wrap around the end of the file
-		's'	set the ' mark at the previous location of the
-			cursor.
 		If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
 
 		If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
@@ -3834,13 +4030,18 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline}]])			*search()*
 <		When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies
 		that the search does not wrap around the end of the file.
 
-		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
-		The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
-		flag is used).
 		If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
 		move.  No error message is given.
+		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
+							*search()-sub-match*
+		With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the
+		first sub-match in \(\).  One if none of them matched but the
+		whole pattern did match.
 		To get the column number too use |searchpos()|.
 
+		The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
+		flag is used.
+
 		Example (goes over all files in the argument list): >
 		    :let n = 1
 		    :while n <= argc()	    " loop over all files in arglist
@@ -3857,6 +4058,19 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline}]])			*search()*
 		    :  let n = n + 1
 		    :endwhile
 <
+		Example for using some flags: >
+		    :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe')
+<		This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif"
+		under or after the cursor.  Because of the 'p' flag, it
+		returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0
+		if the search fails.  With the cursor on the first word of the
+		line:
+		    if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~
+		the function returns 1.  Without the 'c' flag, the function
+		finds the "endif" and returns 3.  The same thing happens
+		without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if".
+		The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor.
+
 
 searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])			*searchdecl()*
 		Search for the declaration of {name}.
@@ -3896,12 +4110,12 @@ searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [, {stopline}]]])
 			searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>')
 <		By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped.
 
-		{flags} are used like with |search()|.  Additionally:
-		'n'	do Not move the cursor
+		{flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with
+		|search()|.  Additionally:
 		'r'	Repeat until no more matches found; will find the
 			outer pair
 		'm'	return number of Matches instead of line number with
-			the match; will only be > 1 when 'r' is used.
+			the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used.
 
 		When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the
 		{skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on
@@ -3975,9 +4189,15 @@ searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline}]])		*searchpos()*
 		is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
 		the column position of the match. If no match is found,
 		returns [0, 0].
->
-			:let [lnum,col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n')
-<
+		Example: >
+	:let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n')
+
+<		When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with
+		the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|.  Example: >
+	:let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np')
+<		In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is
+		found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|.
+
 server2client( {clientid}, {string})			*server2client()*
 		Send a reply string to {clientid}.  The most recent {clientid}
 		that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>").
@@ -4050,6 +4270,33 @@ setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}])			*setloclist()*
 		invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned.
 		Otherwise, same as setqflist().
 
+							*setpos()*
+setpos({expr}, {list})
+		Set the position for {expr}.  Possible values:
+			.	the cursor
+			'x	mark x
+
+		{list} must be a |List| with four numbers:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+
+		"bufnum" is the buffer number.  Zero can be used for the
+		current buffer.  Setting the cursor is only possible for 
+		the current buffer.  To set a mark in another buffer you can
+		use the |bufnr()| function to turn a file name into a buffer
+		number.
+		Does not change the jumplist.
+
+		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
+		column is 1.  Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark.
+
+		The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then
+		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a Tab or after the last
+		character.
+
+		Also see |getpos()|
+
+
 setqflist({list} [, {action}])				*setqflist()*
 		Create or replace or add to the quickfix list using the items
 		in {list}.  Each item in {list} is a dictionary.
@@ -4124,17 +4371,28 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 		nothing: >
 			:call setreg('a', '', 'al')
 
-setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val})			*setwinvar()*
-		Set option or local variable {varname} in window {nr} to
-		{val}.  When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
+settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})	*settabwinvar()*
+		Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to
+		{val}.
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.  For the current tabpage
+		use |setwinvar()|.
+		When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
 		This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it
 		doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable.
 		For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged.
 		Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used.
+		Vim briefly goes to the tab page {tabnr}, this may trigger
+		TabLeave and TabEnter autocommands.
+		Examples: >
+			:call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0)
+			:call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar")
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val})			*setwinvar()*
+		Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page.
 		Examples: >
 			:call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0)
 			:call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar")
-<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
 
 simplify({filename})					*simplify()*
 		Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
@@ -4252,6 +4510,17 @@ split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]])			*split()*
 <		The opposite function is |join()|.
 
 
+str2nr( {expr} [, {base}])				*str2nr()*
+		Convert string {expr} to a number.
+		{base} is the conversion base, it can be 8, 10 or 16.
+		When {base} is omitted base 10 is used.  This also means that
+		a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as
+		with the default String to Number conversion.
+		When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.  With a
+		different base the result will be zero.
+		Text after the number is silently ignored.
+	
+
 strftime({format} [, {time}])				*strftime()*
 		The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as
 		specified by the {format} string.  The given {time} is used,
@@ -4327,7 +4596,7 @@ strpart({src}, {start}[, {len}])			*strpart()*
 			strpart("abcdefg", 3)       == "defg"
 <		Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0.  For
 		example, to get three bytes under and after the cursor: >
-			strpart(getline(line(".")), col(".") - 1, 3)
+			strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 3)
 <
 strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])			*strridx()*
 		The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
@@ -4463,6 +4732,9 @@ system({expr} [, {input}])				*system()* *E677*
 		For Unix and OS/2 braces are put around {expr} to allow for
 		concatenated commands.
 
+		The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a
+		CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least).
+
 		The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|.
 		This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
 
@@ -4508,6 +4780,11 @@ tabpagewinnr({tabarg}, [{arg}])				*tabpagewinnr()*
 		    tabpagewinnr(4, '$')    " number of windows in tab page 4
 <		When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned.
 
+							*tagfiles()*
+tagfiles()	Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags
+		for the current buffer.  This is the 'tags' option expanded.
+
+
 taglist({expr})							*taglist()*
 		Returns a list of tags matching the regular expression {expr}.
 		Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following
@@ -4544,11 +4821,6 @@ taglist({expr})							*taglist()*
 		located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of
 		the tags file generated by the different ctags tools.
 
-							*tagfiles()*
-tagfiles()	Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags
-		for the current buffer.  This is the 'tags' option expanded.
-
-
 tempname()					*tempname()* *temp-file-name*
 		The result is a String, which is the name of a file that
 		doesn't exist.  It can be used for a temporary file.  The name
@@ -4616,6 +4888,10 @@ virtcol({expr})						*virtcol()*
 		For the use of {expr} see |col()|.  Additionally you can use
 		[lnum, col]: a |List| with the line and column number.  When
 		"lnum" or "col" is out of range then virtcol() returns zero.
+		When 'virtualedit' is used it can be [lnum, col, off], where
+		"off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a Tab or after the last
+		character.
 		For the byte position use |col()|.
 		When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position
 		beyond the end of the line can be returned. |'virtualedit'|
@@ -4692,11 +4968,40 @@ winnr([{arg}])	The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
 							*winrestcmd()*
 winrestcmd()	Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore
 		the current window sizes.  Only works properly when no windows
-		are opened or closed and the current window is unchanged.
+		are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is
+		unchanged.
 		Example: >
 			:let cmd = winrestcmd()
 			:call MessWithWindowSizes()
 			:exe cmd
+<
+							*winrestview()*
+winrestview({dict})
+		Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore
+		the view of the current window.
+		If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable.
+		If the window size changed the result won't be the same.
+
+							*winsaveview()*
+winsaveview()	Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore
+		the view of the current window.  Use |winrestview()| to
+		restore the view.
+		This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the
+		buffer and you want to go back to the original view.
+		This does not save fold information.  Use the 'foldenable'
+		option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are
+		not opened when moving around.
+		The return value includes:
+			lnum		cursor line number
+			col		cursor column
+			coladd		cursor column offset for 'virtualedit'
+			curswant	column for vertical movement
+			topline		first line in the window
+			topfill		filler lines, only in diff mode
+			leftcol		first column displayed
+			skipcol		columns skipped
+		Note that no option values are saved.
+
 
 winwidth({nr})						*winwidth()*
 		The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}.
@@ -4797,7 +5102,6 @@ gui			Compiled with GUI enabled.
 gui_athena		Compiled with Athena GUI.
 gui_gtk			Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
 gui_gtk2		Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
-gui_kde			Compiled with KDE GUI |KVim|
 gui_mac			Compiled with Macintosh GUI.
 gui_motif		Compiled with Motif GUI.
 gui_photon		Compiled with Photon GUI.
@@ -5116,7 +5420,7 @@ with local variables in a calling function.  Example: >
 The names "lnum" and "col" could also be passed as argument to Bar(), to allow
 the caller to set the names.
 
-							*:cal* *:call* *E107*
+						*:cal* *:call* *E107* *E117*
 :[range]cal[l] {name}([arguments])
 		Call a function.  The name of the function and its arguments
 		are as specified with |:function|.  Up to 20 arguments can be
@@ -5233,6 +5537,9 @@ Also note that if you have two script files, and one calls a function in the
 other and vise versa, before the used function is defined, it won't work.
 Avoid using the autoload functionality at the toplevel.
 
+Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the
+|vimball| utility.  Also read the user manual |distribute-script|.
+
 ==============================================================================
 6. Curly braces names					*curly-braces-names*
 
@@ -5409,9 +5716,12 @@ This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
 :let {var-name}	..	List the value of variable {var-name}.  Multiple
 			variable names may be given.  Special names recognized
 			here:				*E738*
-			  g:	global variables.
-			  b:	local buffer variables.
-			  w:	local window variables.
+			  g:	global variables
+			  b:	local buffer variables
+			  w:	local window variables
+			  t:	local tab page variables
+			  s:	script-local variables
+			  l:	local function variables
 			  v:	Vim variables.
 
 :let			List the values of all variables.  The type of the
@@ -5467,8 +5777,8 @@ This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
 
 			Note that when two variables refer to the same |List|
 			and you lock one of them, the |List| will also be
-			locked when used through the other variable.  Example:
-			>
+			locked when used through the other variable.
+			Example: >
 				:let l = [0, 1, 2, 3]
 				:let cl = l
 				:lockvar l
@@ -6953,7 +7263,7 @@ This is not guaranteed 100% secure, but it should block most attacks.
 
 							*sandbox-option*
 A few options contain an expression.  When this expression is evaluated it may
-have to be done in the sandbox to avoid a security risc.  But the sandbox is
+have to be done in the sandbox to avoid a security risk.  But the sandbox is
 restrictive, thus this only happens when the option was set from an insecure
 location.  Insecure in this context are:
 - sourcing a .vimrc or .exrc in the current directlry

runtime/doc/evim-pl.1

@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+.TH EVIM 1 "2002 Lut 16"
+.SH NAZWA
+evim \- <20>atwy Vim, edytuj plik w Vimie z ustawieniami dla edycji bez
+tryb<EFBFBD>w
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.br
+.B evim
+[opcje] [plik ...]
+.br
+.B eview
+.SH OPIS
+.B eVim
+uruchamia
+.B Vima
+i ustawia opcje tak by zachowywa<77> si<73> jak edytor bez tryb<79>w.
+To jest ca<63>y czas Vim ale u<>ywany jako edytor wska<6B>-i-kliknij.
+Zachowanie w stlu Notepada dla MS-Windows.
+.B eVim
+b<EFBFBD>dzie zawsze uruchomiony w GUI by w<><77>czy<7A> menu i pasek narz<72>dzi.
+.PP
+Przeznaczony tylko dla ludzi, kt<6B>rzy naprawd<77> nie potrafi<66> pracowa<77>
+z Vimem w normalny spos<6F>b. Edycja b<>dzie o wiele mniej efektywna.
+.PP
+.B eview
+dzia<EFBFBD>a tak samo, ale zaczyna w trybie tylko do odczytu. Dzia<69>a tak
+samo jak evim \-R.
+.PP
+Zobacz vim(1) by pozna<6E> wi<77>cej szczeg<65><67><EFBFBD>w o Vimie, opcjach, itd.
+.PP
+Opcja 'insertmode' jest ustawiona by mo<6D>na by<62>o od razu wpisywa<77>
+tekst.
+.br
+Mapowania s<> ustawione tak by Kopiowanie i Wklejanie dzia<69>a<EFBFBD>o
+z klawiszami MS-Windows. CTRL-X wycina tekst, CTRL-C kopiuje
+a CTRL-V wkleja. U<>yj CTRL-Q by uzyska<6B> oryginalne znaczenie
+CTRL-V.
+.SH OPCJE
+Zobacz vim(1).
+.SH PLIKI
+.TP 15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/evim.vim
+Skrypt uruchamiania dla eVima.
+.SH ZNANY JAKO
+Znany jako "Vim dla frajer<65>w".
+Je<EFBFBD>li u<>ywasz evima oczekuje si<73>, <20>e wyjmiesz chusteczk<7A> do nosa,
+zrobisz w<>z<EFBFBD><7A> w ka<6B>dym rogu i b<>dziesz to nosi<73> na g<>owie.
+.SH ZOBACZ TAK<EFBFBD>E
+vim(1)
+.SH AUTOR
+Wi<EFBFBD>kszo<EFBFBD><EFBFBD> 
+.B Vima
+zosta<EFBFBD>a napisana przez Brama Moolenaara z du<64><75> pomoc<6F> innych os<6F>b.
+Zobacz menu Help/Credits.

runtime/doc/evim-pl.UTF-8.1

@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+.TH EVIM 1 "2002 Lut 16"
+.SH NAZWA
+evim \- łatwy Vim, edytuj plik w Vimie z ustawieniami dla edycji bez
+trybów
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.br
+.B evim
+[opcje] [plik ...]
+.br
+.B eview
+.SH OPIS
+.B eVim
+uruchamia
+.B Vima
+i ustawia opcje tak by zachowywał się jak edytor bez trybów.
+To jest cały czas Vim ale używany jako edytor wskaż-i-kliknij.
+Zachowanie w stlu Notepada dla MS-Windows.
+.B eVim
+będzie zawsze uruchomiony w GUI by włączyć menu i pasek narzędzi.
+.PP
+Przeznaczony tylko dla ludzi, którzy naprawdę nie potrafią pracować
+z Vimem w normalny sposób. Edycja będzie o wiele mniej efektywna.
+.PP
+.B eview
+działa tak samo, ale zaczyna w trybie tylko do odczytu. Działa tak
+samo jak evim \-R.
+.PP
+Zobacz vim(1) by poznać więcej szczegółów o Vimie, opcjach, itd.
+.PP
+Opcja 'insertmode' jest ustawiona by można było od razu wpisywać
+tekst.
+.br
+Mapowania są ustawione tak by Kopiowanie i Wklejanie działało
+z klawiszami MS-Windows. CTRL-X wycina tekst, CTRL-C kopiuje
+a CTRL-V wkleja. Użyj CTRL-Q by uzyskać oryginalne znaczenie
+CTRL-V.
+.SH OPCJE
+Zobacz vim(1).
+.SH PLIKI
+.TP 15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/evim.vim
+Skrypt uruchamiania dla eVima.
+.SH ZNANY JAKO
+Znany jako "Vim dla frajerów".
+Jeśli używasz evima oczekuje się, że wyjmiesz chusteczkę do nosa,
+zrobisz węzęł w każdym rogu i będziesz to nosił na głowie.
+.SH ZOBACZ TAKŻE
+vim(1)
+.SH AUTOR
+Większość 
+.B Vima
+została napisana przez Brama Moolenaara z dużą pomocą innych osób.
+Zobacz menu Help/Credits.

runtime/doc/farsi.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Mortaza Ghassab Shiran

runtime/doc/filetype.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Sep 16
+*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -148,6 +148,7 @@ can be used to overrule the filetype used for certain extensions:
 	*.i		g:filetype_i	|ft-progress-syntax|
 	*.p		g:filetype_p	|ft-pascal-syntax|
 	*.sh		g:bash_is_sh	|ft-sh-syntax|
+	*.tex		g:tex_flavor	|ft-tex-plugin|
 
 							*filetype-ignore*
 To avoid that certain files are being inspected, the g:ft_ignore_pat variable
@@ -536,4 +537,22 @@ Since the text for this plugin is rather long it has been put in a separate
 file: |pi_spec.txt|.
 
 
+SQL							*ft-sql*
+
+Since the text for this plugin is rather long it has been put in a separate
+file: |sql.txt|.
+
+
+TEX							*ft-tex-plugin*
+
+If the first line of a *.tex file has the form >
+	%&<format>
+then this determined the file type:  plaintex (for plain TeX), context (for
+ConTeXt), or tex (for LaTeX).  Otherwise, the file is searched for keywords to
+choose context or tex.  If no keywords are found, it defaults to plaintex.
+You can change the default by defining the variable g:tex_flavor to the format
+(not the file type) you use most:  plain or context or latex.  (Currently no
+other formats are recognized.)
+
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/fold.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Sep 10
+*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -109,6 +109,7 @@ level of the previous line.
 
 There must be no side effects from the expression.  The text in the buffer,
 cursor position, the search patterns, options etc. must not be changed.
+You can change and restore them if you are careful.
 
 If there is some error in the expression, or the resulting value isn't
 recognized, there is no error message and the fold level will be zero.

runtime/doc/getscript.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,303 @@
+*getscript.txt*	For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 24
+
+		Get the Latest VimScripts
+
+Authors:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamilyA.Mbiz>
+	  (remove NOSPAM from the email address)
+						*GetLatestVimScripts-copyright*
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2005 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
+           The VIM LICENSE applies to GetLatestVimScripts.vim and
+           GetLatestVimScripts.txt (see |copyright|) except use
+           "GetLatestVimScripts" instead of "Vim".
+           No warranty, express or implied.  Use At-Your-Own-Risk.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Contents						*glvs-contents*
+
+	1. Contents.......................................: |glvs-contents|
+	2. GetLatestVimScripts Usage......................: |glvs|
+	3. GetLatestVimScripts Data File..................: |glvs-data|
+	4. GetLatestVimScripts Plugins....................: |glvs-plugins|
+	5. GetLatestVimScripts AutoInstall................: |glvs-autoinstall|
+	6. GetLatestVimScripts Algorithm..................: |glvs-alg|
+	7. GetLatestVimScripts History....................: |glvs-hist|
+
+
+==============================================================================
+2. GetLatestVimScripts Usage	      *getlatestvimscripts* *getscript* *glvs*
+
+	While in vim, type
+>
+		:GetLatestVimScripts
+<
+	Unless its been defined elsewhere,
+>
+		:GLVS
+<
+	will also work.
+
+	The script will attempt to update and, if so directed, automatically
+	install scripts from http://vim.sourceforge.net/.  To do so it will
+	peruse a file, [.vim|vimfiles]/GetLatest/GetLatestVimScripts.dat
+	(see |glvs-data|), and examine plugins in your [.vim|vimfiles]/plugin
+	directory (see |glvs-plugins|).
+
+	Scripts which have been downloaded will appear in the .../GetLatest
+	subdirectory.
+
+	The <GetLatestVimScripts.dat> file will be automatically be updated to
+	reflect the latest version of script(s) so downloaded.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+3. GetLatestVimScripts Data File	*getlatestvimscripts-data* *glvs-data*
+
+	The Data file has a header which should appear as:
+>
+		ScriptID SourceID Filename
+		--------------------------
+<
+	Below that are three columns; the first two are numeric followed by a
+	text column.
+
+	The first number on each line gives the script's ScriptID.  When
+	you're about to use a web browser to look at scripts on
+	http://vim.sf.net/, just before you click on the script's link, you'll
+	see a line resembling
+
+	http://vim.sourceforge.net/scripts/script.php?script_id=40
+
+	The "40" happens to be a ScriptID that GetLatestVimScripts needs to
+	download the associated page.
+
+	The second number on each line gives the script's SourceID.  The
+	SourceID records the count of uploaded scripts as determined by
+	vim.sf.net; hence it serves to indicate "when" a script was uploaded.
+	Setting the SourceID to 1 insures that GetLatestVimScripts will assume
+	that the script it has is out-of-date.
+
+	The SourceID is extracted by GetLatestVimScripts from the script's
+	page on vim.sf.net; whenever its greater than the one stored in the
+	GetLatestVimScripts.dat file, the script will be downloaded.
+
+	If your script's author has included a special comment line in his/her
+	plugin, the plugin itself will be used by GetLatestVimScripts to build
+	your <GetLatestVimScripts.dat> file, including any dependencies on
+	other scripts it may have.
+
+	If your comment field begins with :AutoInstall:, GetLatestVimScripts
+	will attempt to automatically install the script.  Thus,
+	GetLatestVimScripts thus provides a comprehensive ability to keep your
+	plugins up-to-date!
+
+==============================================================================
+4. GetLatestVimScripts Plugins	*getlatestvimscripts-plugins* *glvs-plugins*
+
+
+	If a plugin author includes the following comment anywhere in their
+	plugin, GetLatestVimScripts will find it and use it to build user's
+	GetLatestVimScripts.dat files:
+>
+	                             src_id
+		                            v
+		" GetLatestVimScripts: ### ### yourscriptname
+		                        ^
+		                    scriptid
+<   
+	As an author, you should include such a line in to refer to your own
+	script plus any additional lines describing any plugin dependencies it
+	may have.  Same format, of course!
+
+	If your command is auto-installable (see |glvs-autoinstall|), and most
+	scripts are, then you may include :AutoInstall: at the start of
+	"yourscriptname".
+
+	GetLatestVimScript commands for those scripts are then appended, if
+	not already present, to the user's GetLatest/GetLatestVimScripts.dat
+	file.  Its a relatively painless way to automate the acquisition of
+	any scripts your plugins depend upon.
+
+	Now, as an author, you probably don't want GetLatestVimScripts to
+	download your own scripts for you yourself, thereby overwriting your
+	not-yet-released hard work.  GetLatestVimScripts provides a solution
+	for this:  put
+>
+		0 0 yourscriptname
+<
+	into your <GetLatestVimScripts.dat> file and GetLatestVimScripts will
+	skip examining the "yourscriptname" scripts for those
+	GetLatestVimScript comment lines.  As a result, those lines won't be
+	inadvertently installed into your <GetLatestVimScripts.dat> file and
+	subsequently used to download your own scripts.  This is especially
+	important to do if you've included the :AutoInstall: option.
+
+	Be certain to use the same "yourscriptname" in the "0 0
+	yourscriptname" line as you've used in your GetLatestVimScript
+	comment!
+
+
+==============================================================================
+5. GetLatestVimScripts AutoInstall	*getlatestvimscripts-autoinstall*
+					*glvs-autoinstall*
+
+	GetLatestVimScripts now supports "AutoInstall".  Not all scripts are
+	supportive of auto-install, as they may have special things you need
+	to do to install them (please refer to the script's "install"
+	directions).  On the other hand, most scripts will be
+	auto-installable.
+	
+	To let GetLatestVimScripts do an autoinstall, the data file's comment
+	field should begin with (surrounding blanks are ignored):
+	
+		:AutoInstall:
+	
+	Both colons are needed, and it should begin the comment
+	(yourscriptname) field.
+
+	One may prevent any autoinstalling by putting the following line
+	in your <.vimrc>:
+>
+		let g:GetLatestVimScripts_allowautoinstall= 0
+<
+	
+	With :AutoInstall: enabled, as it is by default, files which end with
+	
+	  ---.tar.bz2  : decompressed and untarred in [.vim|vimfiles] directory
+	  ---.tar.gz   : decompressed and untarred in [.vim|vimfiles] directory
+	  ---.vim.bz2  : decompressed and moved to the .vim/plugin directory
+	  ---.vim.gz   : decompressed and moved to the .vim/plugin directory
+	  ---.zip      : unzipped in [.vim|vimfiles] directory
+	  ---.vim      : moved to [.vim|vimfiles]/plugin directory
+	
+	and which merely need to have their components placed by the
+	untar/gunzip or move-to-plugin-directory process should be
+	auto-installable.
+
+	When is a script not auto-installable?  Let me give an example:
+>
+		[.vim|vimfiles]/after/syntax/blockhl.vim
+<
+	The <blockhl.vim> script provides block highlighting for C/C++
+	programs; it is available at:
+>
+		http://vim.sourceforge.net/scripts/script.php?script_id=104
+<
+	Currently, vim's after/syntax only supports by-filetype scripts (in
+	blockhl.vim's case, that's after/syntax/c.vim).  Hence, auto-install
+	would possibly overwrite the current user's after/syntax/c.vim file.
+	
+	In my own case, I use <aftersyntax.vim> (renamed to
+	after/syntax/c.vim) to allow a after/syntax/c/ directory:
+>
+		http://vim.sourceforge.net/scripts/script.php?script_id=1023
+<
+	The script allows multiple syntax files to exist separately in the
+	after/syntax/c subdirectory.  I can't bundle aftersyntax.vim in and
+	build an appropriate tarball for auto-install because of the potential
+	for the after/syntax/c.vim contained in it to overwrite a user's
+	c.vim.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+6. GetLatestVimScripts Algorithm	*getlatestvimscripts-algorithm*
+								*glvs-alg*
+
+	The Vim sourceforge page dynamically creates a page by keying off of
+	the so-called script-id.  Within the webpage of
+
+		http://vim.sourceforge.net/scripts/script.php?script_id=40
+
+	is a line specifying the latest source-id (src_id).  The source
+	identifier numbers are always increasing, hence if the src_id is
+	greater than the one recorded for the script in GetLatestVimScripts
+	then its time to download a newer copy of that script.
+
+	GetLatestVimScripts will then download the script and update its
+	internal database of script ids, source ids, and scriptnames.
+
+	The AutoInstall process will:
+
+		Move the file from GetLatest/ to the following directory
+			Unix   : $HOME/.vim
+			Windows: $HOME\vimfiles
+	
+		if the downloaded file ends with ".bz2"
+			bunzip2 it
+		else if the downloaded file ends with ".gz"
+			gunzip it
+		if the resulting file ends with ".zip"
+			unzip it
+		else if the resulting file ends with ".tar"
+			tar -oxvf it
+		else if the resulting file ends with ".vim"
+			move it to the plugin subdirectory
+
+
+==============================================================================
+7. GetLatestVimScripts History       *getlatestvimscripts-history* *glvs-hist*
+
+	v20 Dec 23, 2005 : * Eric Haarbauer found&fixed a bug with unzip use;
+	                     unzip needs the -o flag to overwrite.
+	v19 Nov 28, 2005 : * v18's GetLatestVimScript line accessed the wrong
+	                     script! Fixed.
+	v18 Mar 21, 2005 : * bugfix to automatic database construction
+	                   * bugfix - nowrapscan caused an error
+	                     (tnx to David Green for the fix)
+	    Apr 01, 2005   * if shell is bash, "mv" instead of "ren" used in
+	                     :AutoInstall:s, even though its o/s is windows
+	    Apr 01, 2005   * when downloading errors occurred, GLVS was
+	                     terminating early.  It now just goes on to trying
+	                     the next script (after trying three times to
+	                     download a script description page)
+	    Apr 20, 2005   * bugfix - when a failure to download occurred,
+	                     GetLatestVimScripts would stop early and claim that
+	                     everything was current.  Fixed.
+	v17 Aug 25, 2004 : * g:GetLatestVimScripts_allowautoinstall, which
+	                     defaults to 1, can be used to prevent all
+	                     :AutoInstall:
+	v16 Aug 25, 2004 : * made execution of bunzip2/gunzip/tar/zip silent
+	                   * fixed bug with :AutoInstall: use of helptags
+	v15 Aug 24, 2004 : * bugfix: the "0 0 comment" download prevention wasn't
+	                     always preventing downloads (just usually).  Fixed.
+	v14 Aug 24, 2004 : * bugfix -- helptags was using dotvim, rather than
+	                     s:dotvim.  Fixed.
+	v13 Aug 23, 2004 : * will skip downloading a file if its scriptid or srcid
+	                     is zero.  Useful for script authors; that way their
+	                     own GetLatestVimScripts activity won't overwrite
+	                     their scripts.
+	v12 Aug 23, 2004 : * bugfix - a "return" got left in the distribution that
+	                     was intended only for testing.  Removed, now works.
+	                   * :AutoInstall: implemented
+	v11 Aug 20, 2004 : * GetLatestVimScripts is now a plugin:
+	                   * :GetLatestVimScripts command
+	                   * (runtimepath)/GetLatest/GetLatestVimScripts.dat
+	                     now holds scripts that need updating
+	v10 Apr 19, 2004 : * moved history from script to doc
+	v9  Jan 23, 2004 :   windows (win32/win16/win95) will use
+	                     double quotes ("") whereas other systems will use
+	                     single quotes ('') around the urls in calls via wget
+	v8  Dec 01, 2003 :   makes three tries at downloading
+	v7  Sep 02, 2003 :   added error messages if "Click on..." or "src_id="
+	                     not found in downloaded webpage
+	                     Uses t_ti, t_te, and rs to make progress visible
+	v6  Aug 06, 2003 :   final status messages now display summary of work
+	                     ( "Downloaded someqty scripts" or
+	                       "Everything was current")
+	                     Now GetLatestVimScripts is careful about downloading
+	                     GetLatestVimScripts.vim itself!
+	                     (goes to <NEW_GetLatestVimScripts.vim>)
+	v5  Aug 04, 2003 :   missing an endif near bottom
+	v4  Jun 17, 2003 :   redraw! just before each "considering" message
+	v3  May 27, 2003 :   Protects downloaded files from errant shell
+	                     expansions with single quotes: '...'
+	v2  May 14, 2003 :   extracts name of item to be obtained from the
+	                     script file.  Uses it instead of comment field
+	                     for output filename; comment is used in the
+	                     "considering..." line and is now just a comment!
+	                   * Fixed a bug: a string-of-numbers is not the
+	                     same as a number, so I added zero to them
+	                     and they became numbers.  Fixes comparison.
+
+==============================================================================
+vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 27
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -36,6 +36,10 @@ The X11 version of Vim can run both in GUI and in non-GUI mode.  See
 |gui-x11-start|.
 
 					*gui-init* *gvimrc* *.gvimrc* *_gvimrc*
+The gvimrc file is where GUI-specific startup commands should be placed.  It
+is always sourced after the |vimrc| file.  If you have one then the $MYGVIMRC
+environment variable has its name.
+
 When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order:
 - The 'term' option is set to "builgin_gui" and terminal options are reset to
   their default value for the GUI |terminal-options|.
@@ -66,6 +70,8 @@ When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order:
   - For Win32, when $HOME is not set, "$VIM\_gvimrc" is used.
   - When a "_gvimrc" file is not found, ".gvimrc" is tried too.  And vice
     versa.
+  The name of the first file found is stored in $MYGVIMRC, unless it was
+  already set.
 - If the 'exrc' option is set (which is NOT the default) the file ./.gvimrc
   is sourced, if it exists and isn't the same file as the system or user
   gvimrc file.  If this file is not owned by you, some security restrictions
@@ -499,6 +505,8 @@ floating menus that do not appear on the main menu bar.
 				*:nme* *:nmenu* *:nnoreme* *:nnoremenu*
 				*:ome* *:omenu* *:onoreme* *:onoremenu*
 				*:vme* *:vmenu* *:vnoreme* *:vnoremenu*
+				*:xme* *:xmenu* *:xnoreme* *:xnoremenu*
+				*:sme* *:smenu* *:snoreme* *:snoremenu*
 				*:ime* *:imenu* *:inoreme* *:inoremenu*
 				*:cme* *:cmenu* *:cnoreme* *:cnoremenu*
 				*E330* *E327* *E331* *E336* *E333*
@@ -787,6 +795,8 @@ using the last visual selection.
 						*:nunme* *:nunmenu*
 						*:ounme* *:ounmenu*
 						*:vunme* *:vunmenu*
+						*:xunme* *:xunmenu*
+						*:sunme* *:sunmenu*
 						*:iunme* *:iunmenu*
 						*:cunme* *:cunmenu*
 To delete a menu item or a whole submenu, use the unmenu commands, which are

runtime/doc/gui_w16.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w16.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*gui_w16.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Dec 06
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Dec 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/hangulin.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*hangulin.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*hangulin.txt*  For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Chi-Deok Hwang and Sung-Hyun Nam
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ If both are set, VIM_KEYBOARD has higher priority.
 
 Hangul Fonts
 ------------
-You can set text font using $HOME/.Xdefaults or $HOME/.gvimrc.
+You can set text font using $HOME/.Xdefaults or in your gvimrc file.
 But to use Hangul, you should set 'guifontset' in your vimrc.
 
 $HOME/.Xdefaults: >

runtime/doc/hebrew.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*hebrew.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2003 May 11
+*hebrew.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2003 May 11
 
 
 	   VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ron Aaron (and Avner Lottem)

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 27
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 02
 
 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ Editing Effectively ~
 |usr_29.txt|  Moving through programs
 |usr_30.txt|  Editing programs
 |usr_31.txt|  Exploiting the GUI
+|usr_32.txt|  The undo tree
 
 Tuning Vim ~
 |usr_40.txt|  Make new commands
@@ -84,7 +85,7 @@ Making Vim Run ~
 |usr_90.txt|  Installing Vim
 
 
-REFERENCE MANUAL: These files explain every detail of Vim.
+REFERENCE MANUAL: These files explain every detail of Vim.	*reference_toc*
 
 General subjects ~
 |intro.txt|	general introduction to Vim; notation used in help files
@@ -170,6 +171,7 @@ Versions ~
 |version4.txt|	Differences between Vim version 3.0 and 4.x
 |version5.txt|	Differences between Vim version 4.6 and 5.x
 |version6.txt|	Differences between Vim version 5.7 and 6.x
+|version7.txt|	Differences between Vim version 6.4 and 7.x
 						*sys-file-list*
 Remarks about specific systems ~
 |os_390.txt|	OS/390 Unix

runtime/doc/howto.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*howto.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2001 Sep 03
+*howto.txt*	For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ How to ...				*howdoi* *how-do-i* *howto* *how-to*
 |auto-setting|		set options automatically
 |term-dependent-settings| set options depending on terminal name
 |save-settings|		save settings
-|:quote|		comment my exrc/vimrc/gvimrc files
+|:quote|		comment my .vim files
 |'helpheight'|		change the default help height
 |'highlight'|		set various highlighting modes
 |'title'|		set the window title

runtime/doc/if_cscop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Andy Kahn

runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Jan 05
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -166,7 +166,10 @@ interface.
 Common
 ------
     (command {command-string})	    Perform the vim ":Ex" style command.
-    (eval {expr-string})	    Evaluate the vim command string.
+    (eval {expr-string})	    Evaluate the vim expression to a string.
+				    A |List| is turned into a string by
+				    joining the items and inserting line
+				    breaks.
 				    NOTE clashes with MzScheme eval
     (range-start)		    Start/End of the range passed with
     (range-end)			    the Scheme command.

runtime/doc/if_ole.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -77,7 +77,8 @@ Eval(expr)		Evaluate an expression.
 
 This method takes a single parameter, which is an expression in Vim's normal
 format (see |expression|).  It returns a string, which is the result of
-evaluating the expression.
+evaluating the expression.  A |List| is turned into a string by joining the
+items and inserting line breaks.
 
 Examples (Visual Basic syntax) >
 	Line20 = Vim.Eval("getline(20)")

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Oct 14
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -181,6 +181,8 @@ VIM::Eval({expr})	Evaluates {expr} and returns (success, val).
 			value of internal |variables| x, and '$x' is equivalent
 			to perl's $ENV{x}.  All |functions| accessible from
 			the command-line are valid for {expr}.
+			A |List| is turned into a string by joining the items
+			and inserting line breaks.
 
 							*perl-SetHeight*
 Window->SetHeight({height})

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Jan 20
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Jan 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Oct 14
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -78,23 +78,26 @@ Executing Ruby commands is not possible in the |sandbox|.
 Ruby code gets all of its access to vim via the "VIM" module.
 
 Overview >
-	print "Hello"			# displays a message
-	VIM.command(cmd)		# execute an ex command
-	num = VIM::Window.count		# gets the number of windows
-	w = VIM::Window[n]		# gets window "n"
-	cw = VIM::Window.current	# gets the current window
-	num = VIM::Buffer.count		# gets the number of buffers
-	b = VIM::Buffer[n]		# gets buffer "n"
-	cb = VIM::Buffer.current	# gets the current buffer
-	w.height = lines		# sets the window height
-	w.cursor = [row, col]		# sets the window cursor position
-	pos = w.cursor			# gets an array [row, col]
-	name = b.name			# gets the buffer file name
-	line = b[n]			# gets a line from the buffer
-	num = b.count			# gets the number of lines
-	b[n] = str			# sets a line in the buffer
-	b.delete(n)			# deletes a line
-	b.append(n, str)		# appends a line after n
+	print "Hello"			      # displays a message
+	VIM.command(cmd)		      # execute an ex command
+	num = VIM::Window.count		      # gets the number of windows
+	w = VIM::Window[n]		      # gets window "n"
+	cw = VIM::Window.current	      # gets the current window
+	num = VIM::Buffer.count		      # gets the number of buffers
+	b = VIM::Buffer[n]		      # gets buffer "n"
+	cb = VIM::Buffer.current	      # gets the current buffer
+	w.height = lines		      # sets the window height
+	w.cursor = [row, col]		      # sets the window cursor position
+	pos = w.cursor			      # gets an array [row, col]
+	name = b.name			      # gets the buffer file name
+	line = b[n]			      # gets a line from the buffer
+	num = b.count			      # gets the number of lines
+	b[n] = str			      # sets a line in the buffer
+	b.delete(n)			      # deletes a line
+	b.append(n, str)		      # appends a line after n
+	line = VIM::Buffer.current.line       # gets the current line
+	num = VIM::Buffer.current.line_number # gets the current line number
+	VIM::Buffer.current.line = "test"     # sets the current line number
 <
 
 Module Functions:
@@ -117,6 +120,8 @@ VIM::command({cmd})
 VIM::evaluate({expr})
 	Evaluates {expr} using the vim internal expression evaluator (see
 	|expression|).  Returns the expression result as a string.
+	A |List| is turned into a string by joining the items and inserting
+	line breaks.
 
 ==============================================================================
 3. VIM::Buffer objects					*ruby-buffer*
@@ -142,6 +147,11 @@ self[{n}] = {str}
 delete({n})	Deletes a line from the buffer. {n} is the line number.
 append({n}, {str})
 		Appends a line after the line {n}.
+line            Returns the current line of the buffer if the buffer is
+		active.
+line = {str}    Sets the current line of the buffer if the buffer is active.
+line_number     Returns the number of the current line if the buffer is
+		active.
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. VIM::Window objects					*ruby-window*

runtime/doc/if_sniff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL

runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Oct 14
+*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ingo Wilken
@@ -133,7 +133,8 @@ Commands:
 	Evaluates the expression {expr} using vim's internal expression
 	evaluator (see |expression|).   Any expression that queries a buffer
 	or window property uses the current buffer/current window.  Returns
-	the result as a string.
+	the result as a string.  A |List| is turned into a string by joining
+	the items and inserting line breaks.
 	Examples: >
 		set perl_available [::vim::expr has("perl")]
 <	See also |tcl-window-expr| and |tcl-buffer-expr|.

runtime/doc/indent.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Aug 30
+*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -33,7 +33,9 @@ There are in fact four methods available for indentation:
 The rest of this section describes the 'cindent' option.
 
 Note that 'cindent' indenting does not work for every code scenario.  Vim
-is not a C compiler: it does not recognize all syntax.
+is not a C compiler: it does not recognize all syntax.  One requirement is
+that toplevel functions have a '{' in the first column.  Otherwise they are
+easily confused with declarations.
 
 These four options control C program indenting:
 'cindent'	Enables Vim to perform C program indenting automatically.
@@ -68,7 +70,7 @@ as follows:
 	"e"	if you type the second 'e' for an "else" at the start of a
 		line
 
-Characters that can precede each key:
+Characters that can precede each key:				*i_CTRL-F*
 !	When a '!' precedes the key, Vim will not insert the key but will
 	instead reindent the current line.  This allows you to define a
 	command key for reindenting the current line.  CTRL-F is the default
@@ -403,6 +405,15 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 		      c1 && c2			c1 && c2
 		     )			    )
 		      foo;			foo;
+<
+	MN    When N is non-zero, line up a line starting with a closing
+	      parentheses with the first character of the previous line.
+	      (default 0).
+
+		cino=			  cino=M1 >
+		  if (cond1 &&		    if (cond1 &&
+		         cond2			   cond2
+		     )			    	   )
 <
 					*java-cinoptions* *java-indenting*
 	jN    Indent java anonymous classes correctly.  The value 'N' is

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 28
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -529,6 +529,7 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_P|	CTRL-W P	   go to preview window
 |CTRL-W_R|	CTRL-W R	   rotate windows upwards N times
 |CTRL-W_S|	CTRL-W S	   same as "CTRL-W s"
+|CTRL-W_T|	CTRL-W T	   move current window to a new tab page
 |CTRL-W_W|	CTRL-W W	   go to N previous window (wrap around)
 |CTRL-W_]|	CTRL-W ]	   split window and jump to tag under cursor
 |CTRL-W_^|	CTRL-W ^	   split current window and edit alternate
@@ -549,6 +550,8 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_g]|	CTRL-W g ]	   split window and do |:tselect| for tag
 				   under cursor
 |CTRL-W_g}|	CTRL-W g }	   do a |:ptjump| to the tag under the cursor
+|CTRL-W_gf|	CTRL-W g f	   edit file name under the cursor in a new
+				   tab page
 |CTRL-W_h|	CTRL-W h	   go to Nth left window (stop at first window)
 |CTRL-W_i|	CTRL-W i	   split window and jump to declaration of
 				   identifier under the cursor
@@ -1088,6 +1091,8 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:cexpr|	:cex[pr]	read errors from expr and jump to first
 |:cfile|	:cf[ile]	read file with error messages and jump to first
 |:cfirst|	:cfir[st]	go to the specified error, default first one
+|:cgetbuffer|	:cgetb[uffer]	get errors from buffer
+|:cgetexpr|	:cgete[xpr]	get errors from expr
 |:cgetfile|	:cg[etfile]	read file with error messages
 |:changes|	:cha[nges]	print the change list
 |:chdir|	:chd[ir]	change directory
@@ -1148,6 +1153,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:dsearch|	:ds[earch]	list one #define
 |:dsplit|	:dsp[lit]	split window and jump to #define
 |:edit|		:e[dit]		edit a file
+|:earlier|	:ea[rlier]	go to older change, undo
 |:echo|		:ec[ho]		echoes the result of expressions
 |:echoerr|	:echoe[rr]	like :echo, show like an error and use history
 |:echohl|	:echoh[l]	set highlighting for echo commands
@@ -1228,6 +1234,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:laddfile|	:laddf[ile]	add locations to current location list
 |:last|		:la[st]		go to the last file in the argument list
 |:language|	:lan[guage]	set the language (locale)
+|:later|	:lat[er]	go to newer change, redo
 |:lbuffer|	:lb[uffer]	parse locations and jump to first location
 |:lcd|		:lc[d]		change directory locally
 |:lchdir|	:lch[dir]	change directory locally
@@ -1239,6 +1246,8 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:lexpr|	:lex[pr]	read locations from expr and jump to first
 |:lfile|	:lf[ile]	read file with locations and jump to first
 |:lfirst|	:lfir[st]	go to the specified location, default first one
+|:lgetbuffer|	:lgetb[uffer]	get locations from buffer
+|:lgetexpr|	:lgete[xpr]	get locations from expr
 |:lgetfile|	:lg[etfile]	read file with locations
 |:lgrep|	:lgr[ep]	run 'grepprg' and jump to first match
 |:lgrepadd|	:lgrepa[dd]	like :grep, but append to current list
@@ -1411,15 +1420,22 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:slast|	:sla[st]	split window and go to last file in the
 				argument list
 |:smagic|	:sm[agic]	:substitute with 'magic'
+|:smap|		:sma[p]		like ":map" but for Select mode
+|:smapclear|	:smapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Select mode
+|:smenu|	:sme[nu]	add menu for Select mode
 |:snext|	:sn[ext]	split window and go to next file in the
 				argument list
 |:sniff|	:sni[ff]	send request to sniff
 |:snomagic|	:sno[magic]	:substitute with 'nomagic'
+|:snoremap|	:snor[emap]	like ":noremap" but for Select mode
+|:snoremenu|	:snoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Select mode
 |:sort|		:sor[t]		sort lines
 |:source|	:so[urce]	read Vim or Ex commands from a file
 |:spelldump|	:spelld[ump]	split window and fill with all correct words
 |:spellgood|	:spe[llgood]	add good word for spelling
+|:spellinfo|	:spelli[nfo]	show info about loaded spell files
 |:spellrepall|	:spellr[epall]	replace all bad words like last |z=|
+|:spellundo|	:spellu[ndo]	remove good or bad word
 |:spellwrong|	:spellw[rong]	add spelling mistake
 |:split|	:sp[lit]	split current window
 |:sprevious|	:spr[evious]	split window and go to previous file in the
@@ -1435,6 +1451,8 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:stjump|	:stj[ump]	do ":tjump" and split window
 |:stselect|	:sts[elect]	do ":tselect" and split window
 |:sunhide|	:sun[hide]	same as ":unhide"
+|:sunmap|	:sunm[ap]	like ":unmap" but for Select mode
+|:sunmenu|	:sunme[nu]	remove menu for Select mode
 |:suspend|	:sus[pend]	same as ":stop"
 |:sview|	:sv[iew]	split window and edit file read-only
 |:swapname|	:sw[apname]	show the name of the current swap file
@@ -1444,6 +1462,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:tNext|	:tN[ext]	jump to previous matching tag
 |:tabNext|	:tabN[ext]	go to previous tab page
 |:tabclose|	:tabc[lose]	close current tab page
+|:tabdo|	:tabdo		execute command in each tab page
 |:tabedit|	:tabe[dit]	edit a file in a new tab page
 |:tabfind|	:tabf[ind]	find file in 'path', edit it in a new tab page
 |:tabfirst|	:tabfir[st]	got to first tab page
@@ -1477,6 +1496,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:tunmenu|	:tu[nmenu]	remove menu tooltip
 |:undo|		:u[ndo]		undo last change(s)
 |:undojoin|	:undoj[oin]	join next change with previous undo block
+|:undolist|	:undol[ist]	list leafs of the undo tree
 |:unabbreviate|	:una[bbreviate]	remove abbreviation
 |:unhide|	:unh[ide]	open a window for each loaded file in the
 				buffer list
@@ -1494,15 +1514,15 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:visual|	:vi[sual]	same as ":edit", but turns off "Ex" mode
 |:viusage|	:viu[sage]	overview of Normal mode commands
 |:view|		:vie[w]		edit a file read-only
-|:vmap|		:vm[ap]		like ":map" but for Visual mode
-|:vmapclear|	:vmapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Visual mode
-|:vmenu|	:vme[nu]	add menu for Visual mode
-|:vnoremap|	:vn[oremap]	like ":noremap" but for Visual mode
+|:vmap|		:vm[ap]		like ":map" but for Visual+Select mode
+|:vmapclear|	:vmapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Visual+Select mode
+|:vmenu|	:vme[nu]	add menu for Visual+Select mode
 |:vnew|		:vne[w]		create a new empty window, vertically split
-|:vnoremenu|	:vnoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Visual mode
+|:vnoremap|	:vn[oremap]	like ":noremap" but for Visual+Select mode
+|:vnoremenu|	:vnoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Visual+Select mode
 |:vsplit|	:vs[plit]	split current window vertically
-|:vunmap|	:vu[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Visual mode
-|:vunmenu|	:vunme[nu]	remove menu for Visual mode
+|:vunmap|	:vu[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Visual+Select mode
+|:vunmenu|	:vunme[nu]	remove menu for Visual+Select mode
 |:windo|	:windo		execute command in each window
 |:write|	:w[rite]	write to a file
 |:wNext|	:wN[ext]	write to a file and go to previous file in
@@ -1522,8 +1542,16 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:wviminfo|	:wv[iminfo]	write to viminfo file
 |:xit|		:x[it]		write if buffer changed and quit window or Vim
 |:xall|		:xa[ll]		same as ":wqall"
+|:xmapclear|	:xmapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Visual mode
+|:xmap|		:xm[ap]		like ":map" but for Visual mode
+|:xmenu|	:xme[nu]	add menu for Visual mode
+|:xnoremap|	:xn[oremap]	like ":noremap" but for Visual mode
+|:xnoremenu|	:xnoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Visual mode
+|:xunmap|	:xu[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Visual mode
+|:xunmenu|	:xunme[nu]	remove menu for Visual mode
 |:yank|		:y[ank]		yank lines into a register
 |:z|		:z		print some lines
 |:~|		:~		repeat last ":substitute"
 
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 23
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -130,6 +130,9 @@ CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+:.-=}					*i_CTRL-R*
 				the cursor up:
 					CTRL-R ="\<Up>"
 				Use CTRL-R CTRL-R to insert text literally.
+				When the result is a |List| the items are used
+				as lines.  They can have line breaks inside
+				too.
 		See |registers| about registers.  {not in Vi}
 
 CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R*
@@ -301,9 +304,11 @@ insert mode:
 
 						*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-E*
 CTRL-X CTRL-E		scroll window one line up.
+			When doing completion look here: |complete_CTRL-E|
 
 						*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-Y*
 CTRL-X CTRL-Y		scroll window one line down.
+			When doing completion look here: |complete_CTRL-Y|
 
 After CTRL-X is pressed, each CTRL-E (CTRL-Y) scrolls the window up (down) by
 one line unless that would cause the cursor to move from its current position
@@ -587,6 +592,19 @@ and CTRL-P (previous).
 
 Also see the 'infercase' option if you want to adjust the case of the match.
 
+							*complete_CTRL-E*
+When completion is active you can use CTRL-E to stop it and go back to the
+orignally typed text.  The CTRL-E will not be inserted.
+
+							*complete_CTRL-Y*
+When the popup menu is displayed you can use CTRL-Y to stop completion and
+accept the currently selected entry.  The CTRL-Y is not inserted.  Typing a
+space, Enter, or some other unprintable character will leave completion mode
+and insert that typed character.
+
+When the popup menu is displayed there are a few more special keys, see
+|popupmenu-keys|.
+
 Note: The keys that are valid in CTRL-X mode are not mapped.  This allows for
 ":map ^F ^X^F" to work (where ^F is CTRL-F and ^X is CTRL-X).  The key that
 ends CTRL-X mode (any key that is not a valid CTRL-X mode command) is mapped.
@@ -985,15 +1003,19 @@ On the second invocation the arguments are:
 The function must return a List with the matching words.  These matches
 usually include the "a:base" text.  When there are no matches return an empty
 List.
-
+						*complete-items*
 Each list item can either be a string or a Dictionary.  When it is a string it
 is used as the completion.  When it is a Dictionary it can contain these
 items:
-	word		the completion, mandatory
-	menu		extra text for the popup menu
-	info		more information about the item
+	word		the text that will be inserted, mandatory
+	abbr		abbreviation of "word"; when not empty it is used in
+			the menu instead of "word"
+	menu		extra text for the popup menu, displayed after "word"
+			or "abbr"
+	info		more information about the item, can be displayed in a
+			preview window
 	kind		single letter indicating the type of completion
-	icase		when not zero case is to be ignored; when omitted
+	icase		when non-zero case is to be ignored; when omitted
 			the 'ignorecase' option is used
 
 All of these except 'icase' must be a string.  If an item does not meet these
@@ -1001,15 +1023,19 @@ requirements then an error message is given and further items in the list are
 not used.  You can mix string and Dictionary items in the returned list.
 
 The "menu" item is used in the popup menu and may be truncated, thus it should
-be relatively short.  The "info" item can be longer, it may be displayed in a
-balloon.
+be relatively short.  The "info" item can be longer, it will  be displayed in
+the preview window when "preview" appears in 'completeopt'.  The "info" item
+will also remain displayed after the popup menu has been removed.  This is
+useful for function arguments.
 
 The "kind" item uses a single letter to indicate the kind of completion.  This
 may be used to show the completion differently (different color or icon).
 Currently these types can be used:
 	v	variable
 	f	function or method
-	c	composite (struct, object)
+	m	member of a struct or class
+	t	typedef
+	d	#define or macro
 
 When searching for matches takes some time call |complete_add()| to add each
 match to the total list.  These matches should then not appear in the returned
@@ -1075,28 +1101,43 @@ INSERT COMPLETION POPUP MENU				*ins-completion-menu*
 Vim can display the matches in a simplistic popup menu.
 
 The menu is used when:
-- The 'completeopt' option contains "menu".
+- The 'completeopt' option contains "menu" or "menuone".
 - The terminal supports at least 8 colors.
 - There are at least two matches.
 
-There are two states:
-1. A complete match has been inserted.
-2. Only part of a match has been inserted.
+The 'pumheight' option can be used to set a maximum height.  The default is to
+use all space available.
+
+There are three states:
+1. A complete match has been inserted, e.g., after using CTRL-N or CTRL-P.
+2. A cursor key has been used to select another match.  The match was not
+   inserted then, only the entry in the popup menu is highlighted.
+3. Only part of a match has been inserted and characters were typed or the
+   backspace key was used.  The list of matches was then adjusted for what is
+   in front of the cursor.
 
 You normally start in the first state, with the first match being inserted.
 When "longest" is in 'completeopt' and there is more than one match you start
-in the second state.
-
-If you select another match, e.g., with CTRL-N or CTRL-P, you go from the
-second to the first state.  This doesn't change the list of matches.
+in the third state.
 
+If you select another match, e.g., with CTRL-N or CTRL-P, you go to the first
+state.  This doesn't change the list of matches.
 
+When you are back at the original text then you are in the third state.  To
+get there right away you can use a mapping that uses CTRL-P right after
+starting the completion: >
+	:imap <F7> <C-N><C-P>
+<
+						*popupmenu-keys*
 In the first state these keys have a special meaning:
 <BS> and CTRL-H   Delete one character, find the matches for the word before
 		  the cursor.  This reduces the list of matches, often to one
 		  entry, and switches to the second state.
+Any non-special character:
+		  Stop completion without changing the match and insert the
+		  typed character.
 
-In the second state these keys have a special meaning:
+In the second and third state these keys have a special meaning:
 <BS> and CTRL-H   Delete one character, find the matches for the shorter word
 		  before the cursor.  This may find more matches.
 CTRL-L		  Add one character from the current match, may reduce the
@@ -1104,18 +1145,26 @@ CTRL-L		  Add one character from the current match, may reduce the
 any printable, non-white character:
 		  Add this character and reduce the number of matches.
 
-In both states these can be used:
-<CR> and <Enter>  Accept the currently selected match and stop completion.
+In all three states these can be used:
+CTRL-Y		  Yes: Accept the currently selected match and stop completion.
+CTRL-E		  End completion, go back to what was typed.
 <PageUp>	  Select a match several entries back, but don't insert it.
 <PageDown>	  Select a match several entries further, but don't insert it.
 <Up>		  Select the previous match, as if CTRL-P was used, but don't
 		  insert it.
 <Down>		  Select the next match, as if CTRL-N was used, but don't
 		  insert it.
-Any other character:
-		  Stop completion without changing the match and insert the
-		  typed character.  Note that typing a space or <Tab> will
-		  work in both states.
+space or <Tab>	  Stop completion without changing the match and insert the
+		  typed character.
+
+The behavior of the Enter key depends on the state you are in:
+first state:	  Use the text as it is and insert a line break.
+second state:	  Insert the currently selected match.
+third state:	  Use the text as it is and insert a line break.
+
+In other words: If you used the cursor keys to select another entry in the
+list of matches then the Enter key inserts that match.  If you typed something
+else then Enter inserts a line break.
 
 
 The colors of the menu can be changed with these highlight groups:
@@ -1129,6 +1178,18 @@ you can use an Insert mode mapping that checks the |pumvisible()| function to
 do something different.  Example: >
 	:inoremap <Down> <C-R>=pumvisible() ? "\<lt>C-N>" : "\<lt>Down>"<CR>
 
+You can use of <expr> in mapping to have the popup menu used when typing a
+character and some condition is met.  For example, for typing a dot: >
+	inoremap <expr> . MayComplete()
+	func MayComplete()
+	    if (can complete)
+	      return ".\<C-X>\<C-O>"
+	    endif
+	    return '.'
+	endfunc
+
+See |:map-<expr>| for more info.
+
 
 FILETYPE-SPECIFIC REMARKS FOR OMNI COMPLETION	    *compl-omni-filetypes*
 
@@ -1142,9 +1203,9 @@ Completion of C code requires a tags file.  You should use Exuberant ctags,
 because it adds extra information that is needed for completion.  You can find
 it here: http://ctags.sourceforge.net/
 For version 5.5.4 you should add a patch that adds the "typename:" field:
-ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/unstable/patches/ctags-5.5.4.patch
+	ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/unstable/patches/ctags-5.5.4.patch
 A compiled .exe for MS-Windows can be found at:
-http://georgevreilly.com/vim/ctags.html
+	http://georgevreilly.com/vim/ctags.html
 
 If you want to complete system functions you can do something like this.  Use
 ctags to generate a tags file for all the system header files: >
@@ -1173,11 +1234,11 @@ are included.
 CSS							*ft-css-omni*
 
 Complete properties and their appropriate values according to CSS 2.1
-specification. 
+specification.
 
 
-HTML and XHTML						*ft-html-omni*
-							*ft-xhtml-omni*
+HTML							*ft-html-omni*
+XHTML							*ft-xhtml-omni*
 
 CTRL-X CTRL-O provides completion of various elements of (X)HTML files.  It is
 designed to support writing of XHTML 1.0 Strict files but will also works for
@@ -1198,12 +1259,12 @@ other versions of HTML. Features:
 - when used after "</" CTRL-X CTRL-O will close the last opened tag
 
 Note: When used first time completion menu will be shown with little delay
-- this is time needed for loading of data file.  
+- this is time needed for loading of data file.
 Note: Completion may fail in badly formatted documents. In such case try to
 run |:make| command to detect formatting problems.
 
 
-JAVASCRIPT                                             *ft-javascript-omni*
+JAVASCRIPT					       *ft-javascript-omni*
 
 Completion of most elements of JavaScript language and DOM elements.
 
@@ -1219,7 +1280,7 @@ Complete:
 Completion works in separate JavaScript files (&ft==javascript), inside of
 <script> tag of (X)HTML and in values of event attributes (including scanning
 of external files.
- 
+
 DOM compatibility
 
 At the moment (beginning of 2006) there are two main browsers - MS Internet
@@ -1227,11 +1288,11 @@ Explorer and Mozilla Firefox. These two applications are covering over 90% of
 market. Theoretically standards are created by W3C organisation
 (http://www.w3c.org) but they are not always followed/implemented.
 
-		IE 	FF 	W3C  Omni completion ~
-		+/-     +/-     +    +               ~
-                +       +       -    +               ~
-                +       -       -    -               ~
-                -       +       -    -               ~
+		IE	FF	W3C  Omni completion ~
+		+/-	+/-	+    +		     ~
+		+	+	-    +		     ~
+		+	-	-    -		     ~
+		-	+	-    -		     ~
 
 Regardless from state of implementation in browsers but if element is defined
 in standards, completion plugin will place element in suggestion list. When
@@ -1239,23 +1300,114 @@ both major engines implemented element, even if this is not in standards it
 will be suggested. All other elements are not placed in suggestion list.
 
 
+PHP							*ft-php-omni*
+
+Completion of PHP code requires tags file for completion of data from external
+files. You should use Exuberant ctags version 5.5.4 or newer. You can find it
+here: http://ctags.sourceforge.net/
+
+Script completes:
+
+- after $ variables name
+  - if variable was declared as object add "->", if tags file is available show
+    name of class
+  - after "->" complete only function and variable names specific for given
+    class. To find class location and contents tags file is required. Because
+    PHP isn't strongly typed language user can use @var tag to declare class: >
+
+    	/* @var $myVar myClass */
+	$myVar->
+<
+    Still, to find myClass contents tags file is required.
+
+- function names with additonal info:
+  - in case of built-in functions list of possible arguments and after | type
+    data returned by function
+  - in case of user function arguments and name of file were function was
+    defined (if it is not current file)
+
+- constants names
+- class names after "new" declaration
+
+
+Note: when doing completion first time Vim will load all necessary data into
+memory. It may take several seconds. After next use of completion delay
+should not be noticeable.
+
+Script detects if cursor is inside <?php ?> tags. If it is outside it will
+automatically switch to HTML/CSS/JavaScript completion. Note: contrary to
+original HTML files completion of tags (and only tags) isn't context aware.
+
+
 SYNTAX							*ft-syntax-omni*
 
 This uses the current syntax highlighting for completion.  It can be used for
 any filetype and provides a minimal language-sensitive completion.
 
-To enable code completion do: >
-	source $VIMRUNTIME/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim
+To enable syntax code completion you can run: >
+	setlocal omnifunc=syntaxcomplete#Complete
 
-You can automate this by placing this in your vimrc (after any ":filetype"
-command): >
-	autocmd Filetype * 
-		    \ if exists('&ofu') && &ofu == "" |
-		    \     source $VIMRUNTIME/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim |
-		    \ endif
+You can automate this by placing the following in your vimrc (after any
+":filetype" command): >
+    if has("autocmd") && exists("+omnifunc")
+	autocmd Filetype *
+		    \	if &omnifunc == "" |
+		    \		setlocal omnifunc=syntaxcomplete#Complete |
+		    \	endif
+    endif
 
-The above will set completion to this script only if a proper one does not
-already exist for that filetype.
+The above will set completion to this script only if a specific plugin does
+not already exist for that filetype.
+
+Each filetype can have a wide range of syntax items.  The plugin allows you to
+customize which syntax groups to include or exclude from the list.  Let's have
+a look at the PHP filetype to see how this works.
+
+If you edit a file called, index.php, run the following command: >
+	:syntax list
+
+First thing you will notice is there are many different syntax groups.  The
+PHP language can include elements from different languages like HTML,
+JavaScript and many more.  The syntax plugin will only include syntax groups
+that begin with the filetype, "php", in this case.  For example these syntax
+groups are included by default with the PHP: phpEnvVar, phpIntVar,
+phpFunctions.
+
+The PHP language has an enormous number of items which it knows how to syntax
+highlight.  This means these items will be available within the omni
+completion list.  Some people may find this list unwieldy or are only
+interested in certain items.
+
+There are two ways to prune this list (if necessary).  If you find certain
+syntax groups you do not wish displayed you can add the following to your
+vimrc: >
+	let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_php = 'phpCoreConstant,phpConstant'
+
+Add as many syntax groups to this list by comma separating them.  The basic
+form of this variable is: >
+	let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 'comma,separated,list'
+
+For completeness the opposite is also true.  Creating this variable in your
+vimrc will only include the items in the phpFunctions and phpMethods syntax
+groups: >
+	let g:omni_syntax_group_include_php = 'phpFunctions,phpMethods'
+
+You can create as many of these variables as you need, varying only the
+filetype at the end of the variable name.
+
+
+SQL							*ft-sql-omni*
+
+Completion for the SQL language includes statements, functions, keywords.
+It will also dynamically complete tables, procedures, views and column lists
+with data pulled directly from within a database.  For detailed instructions
+and a tutorial see |omni-sql-completion|.
+
+The SQL completion plugin can be used in conjunction with other completion
+plugins.  For example, the PHP filetype has it's own completion plugin.
+Since PHP is often used to generate dynamic website by accessing a database,
+the SQL completion plugin can also be enabled.  This allows you to complete
+PHP code and SQL code at the same time.
 
 
 XML							*ft-xml-omni*
@@ -1270,8 +1422,8 @@ Features are:
   a tag)
 - when attribute has limited number of possible values help to complete
   them
-- complete names of entities (defined in |xml-omni-datafile| and in current file
-  with "<!ENTITY" declarations
+- complete names of entities (defined in |xml-omni-datafile| and in current
+  file with "<!ENTITY" declarations
 - when used after "</" CTRL-X CTRL-O will close the last opened tag
 
 Format of XML data file					*xml-omni-datafile*
@@ -1284,9 +1436,9 @@ which will not create conflicts in future. For example name xhtml10s.vim means
 it is data file for XHTML 1.0 Strict.
 
 File contains one variable with fixed name: g:xmldata_xhtml10s . It is
-compound from two parts: 
+compound from two parts:
 
-1. "g:xmldata_"  general prefix 
+1. "g:xmldata_"  general prefix
 2. "xhtml10s"    name of file and name of described XML dialect
 
 Part two must be exactly the same as name of file.
@@ -1297,14 +1449,14 @@ of possible children, second element is |Dictionary| with names of attributes
 as keys and possible values of attributes as values. Example: >
 
     let g:xmldata_crippledhtml = {
-    \ "html": 
-    \ [ ["body", "head"], {"id": [], "xmlns": ["http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"], 
-    \ "lang": [], "xml:lang": [], "dir": ["ltr", "rtl"]}], 
-    \ "script": 
-    \ [ [], {"id": [], "charset": [], "type": ["text/javascript"], "src": [], 
+    \ "html":
+    \ [ ["body", "head"], {"id": [], "xmlns": ["http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"],
+    \ "lang": [], "xml:lang": [], "dir": ["ltr", "rtl"]}],
+    \ "script":
+    \ [ [], {"id": [], "charset": [], "type": ["text/javascript"], "src": [],
     \ "defer": ["BOOL"], "xml:space": ["preserve"]}],
-    \ "meta": 
-    \ [ [], {"id": [], "http-equiv": [], "name": [], "content": [], "scheme": 
+    \ "meta":
+    \ [ [], {"id": [], "http-equiv": [], "name": [], "content": [], "scheme":
     \ [], "lang": [], "xml:lang": [], "dir": ["ltr", "rtl"]}]
     \ "vimxmlentities": ["amp", "lt", "gt", "apos", "quot"]},
     \ "vimxmltaginfo": {
@@ -1516,11 +1668,15 @@ NOTE: ":append" and ":insert" don't work properly in between ":if" and
 10. Inserting a file					*inserting-file*
 
 							*:r* *:re* *:read*
-:r[ead] [name]		Insert the file [name] (default: current file) below
+:r[ead] [++opt] [name]
+			Insert the file [name] (default: current file) below
 			the cursor.
+			See |++opt| for the possible values of [++opt].
 
-:{range}r[ead] [name]	Insert the file [name] (default: current file) below
+:{range}r[ead] [++opt] [name]
+			Insert the file [name] (default: current file) below
 			the specified line.
+			See |++opt| for the possible values of [++opt].
 
 							*:r!* *:read!*
 :r[ead] !{cmd}		Execute {cmd} and insert its standard output below
@@ -1545,6 +1701,14 @@ If a file name is given with ":r", it becomes the alternate file.  This can be
 used, for example, when you want to edit that file instead: ":e! #".  This can
 be switched off by removing the 'a' flag from the 'cpoptions' option.
 
+Of the [++opt] arguments one is specifically for ":read", the ++edit argument.
+This is useful when the ":read" command is actually used to read a file into
+the buffer as if editing that file.  Use this command in an empty buffer: >
+	:read ++edit filename
+The effect is that the 'fileformat', 'fileencoding', 'bomb', etc. options are
+set to what has been detected for "filename".  Note that a single empty line
+remains, you may want to delete it.
+
 							*file-read*
 The 'fileformat' option sets the <EOL> style for a file:
 'fileformat'    characters	   name				~

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Sep 01
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -94,13 +94,15 @@ mention that.
 There are several mailing lists for Vim:
 <vim@vim.org>
 	For discussions about using existing versions of Vim: Useful mappings,
-	questions, answers, where to get a specific version, etc.
+	questions, answers, where to get a specific version, etc.  There are
+	quite a few people watching this list and answering questions, also
+	for beginners.  Don't hesitate to ask your question here.
 <vim-dev@vim.org>				*vim-dev* *vimdev*
 	For discussions about changing Vim: New features, porting, patches,
 	beta-test versions, etc.
 <vim-announce@vim.org>				*vim-announce*
 	Announcements about new versions of Vim; also for beta-test versions
-	and ports to different systems.
+	and ports to different systems.  This is a read-only list.
 <vim-multibyte@vim.org>				*vim-multibyte*
 	For discussions about using and improving the multi-byte aspects of
 	Vim.

runtime/doc/makehtml.awk

@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ NR == 1 { nf=split(FILENAME,f,".")
 	print "<H1>Vim documentation: " f[1] "</H1>";
 	print "<A NAME=\"top\"></A>";
 	if ( FILENAME != "help.txt" ) {
-	  print "<A HREF=\"help.html\">main help file</A>\n";
+	  print "<A HREF=\"index.html\">main help file</A>\n";
 	}
 	print "<HR>";
 	print "<PRE>";
@@ -244,7 +244,15 @@ npipe > 2 && nstar < 3 {
 				find_tag1();
 				}
 				else {
+					if ( f[1] == "index" ) {
+		printf "|<A HREF=\"vimindex.html\">" p[i] "</A>|";
+					} else {
+						if ( f[1] == "help" ) {
+		printf "|<A HREF=\"index.html\">" p[i] "</A>|";
+						} else {
 		printf "|<A HREF=\"" f[1] ".html\">" p[i] "</A>|";
+						}
+					}
 				}
 			}
 		}
@@ -373,13 +381,12 @@ END {
 
 #
 # as main we keep index.txt (by default)
-# other candidate, help.txt
 #
 function topback () {
 	if ( FILENAME != "tags" ) {
 	if ( FILENAME != "help.txt" ) {
 	printf("<A HREF=\"#top\">top</A> - ");
-	printf("<A HREF=\"help.html\">main help file</A>\n");
+	printf("<A HREF=\"index.html\">main help file</A>\n");
 	} else {
 	printf("<A HREF=\"#top\">top</A>\n");
 	}

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 24
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -48,6 +48,8 @@ modes.
 :map	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-nvo|		*:map*
 :nm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-n|		*:nm* *:nmap*
 :vm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-v|		*:vm* *:vmap*
+:xm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-x|		*:xm* *:xmap*
+:smap	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-s|		      *:smap*
 :om[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-o|		*:om* *:omap*
 :map!	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-ic|		*:map!*
 :im[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|		*:im* *:imap*
@@ -62,6 +64,8 @@ modes.
 :no[remap]  {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-nvo|		*:no*  *:noremap*
 :nn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-n|		*:nn*  *:nnoremap*
 :vn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-v|		*:vn*  *:vnoremap*
+:xn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-x|		*:xn*  *:xnoremap*
+:snor[emap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-s|		*:snor* *:snoremap*
 :ono[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-o|		*:ono* *:onoremap*
 :no[remap]! {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-ic|		*:no!* *:noremap!*
 :ino[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|		*:ino* *:inoremap*
@@ -76,6 +80,8 @@ modes.
 :unm[ap]  {lhs}			|mapmode-nvo|		*:unm*  *:unmap*
 :nun[map] {lhs}			|mapmode-n|		*:nun*  *:nunmap*
 :vu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-v|		*:vu*   *:vunmap*
+:xu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-x|		*:xu*   *:xunmap*
+:sunm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-s|		*:sunm* *:sunmap*
 :ou[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-o|		*:ou*   *:ounmap*
 :unm[ap]! {lhs}			|mapmode-ic|		*:unm!* *:unmap!*
 :iu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-i|		*:iu*   *:iunmap*
@@ -92,6 +98,8 @@ modes.
 :mapc[lear]			|mapmode-nvo|		*:mapc*   *:mapclear*
 :nmapc[lear]			|mapmode-n|		*:nmapc*  *:nmapclear*
 :vmapc[lear]			|mapmode-v|		*:vmapc*  *:vmapclear*
+:xmapc[lear]			|mapmode-x|		*:xmapc*  *:xmapclear*
+:smapc[lear]			|mapmode-s|		*:smapc*  *:smapclear*
 :omapc[lear]			|mapmode-o|		*:omapc*  *:omapclear*
 :mapc[lear]!			|mapmode-ic|		*:mapc!*  *:mapclear!*
 :imapc[lear]			|mapmode-i|		*:imapc*  *:imapclear*
@@ -104,6 +112,8 @@ modes.
 :map				|mapmode-nvo|
 :nm[ap]				|mapmode-n|
 :vm[ap]				|mapmode-v|
+:xm[ap]				|mapmode-x|
+:sm[ap]				|mapmode-s|
 :om[ap]				|mapmode-o|
 :map!				|mapmode-ic|
 :im[ap]				|mapmode-i|
@@ -116,6 +126,8 @@ modes.
 :map    {lhs}			|mapmode-nvo|		*:map_l*
 :nm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-n|		*:nmap_l*
 :vm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-v|		*:vmap_l*
+:xm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-x|		*:xmap_l*
+:sm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-s|		*:smap_l*
 :om[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-o|		*:omap_l*
 :map!   {lhs}			|mapmode-ic|		*:map_l!*
 :im[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-i|		*:imap_l*
@@ -145,6 +157,9 @@ type "a", then "bar" will get inserted.
 
 1.2 SPECIAL ARGUMENTS					*:map-arguments*
 
+"<buffer>", "<silent>", "<script>", "<expr>" and "<unique>" can be used in any
+order.  They must appear right after the command, before any other arguments.
+
 				*:map-local* *:map-<buffer>* *E224* *E225*
 If the first argument to one of these commands is "<buffer>" it will apply to
 mappings locally to the current buffer only.  Example: >
@@ -194,8 +209,35 @@ Example of what will fail: >
 If you want to map a key and then have it do what it was originally mapped to,
 have a look at |maparg()|.
 
-"<buffer>", "<silent>", "<script>" and "<unique>" can be used in any order.
-They must appear right after the command, before any other arguments.
+						*:map-<expr>* *:map-expression*
+If the first argument to one of these commands is "<expr>" and it is used to
+define a new mapping or abbreviation, the argument is an expression.  The
+expression is evaluated to obtain the {rhs} that is used.  Example: >
+	:inoremap <expr> . InsertDot()
+The result of the InsertDot() function will be inserted.  It could check the
+text before the cursor and start omni completion when some condition is met.
+
+Be very careful about side effects!  The expression is evaluated while
+obtaining characters, if you change buffer text, move the cursor, edit another
+file, etc. you may very well make command disfunctional.
+
+Here is an example that inserts a list number that increases: >
+	let counter = 0
+	inoremap <expr> <C-L> ListItem()
+	inoremap <expr> <C-R> ListReset()
+
+	func ListItem()
+	  let g:counter += 1
+	  return g:counter . '. '
+	endfunc
+
+	func ListReset()
+	  let g:counter = 0
+	  return ''
+	endfunc
+
+CTRL-L inserts the next number, CTRL-R resets the count.  CTRL-R returns an
+empty string, so that nothing is inserted.
 
 
 1.3 MAPPING AND MODES					*:map-modes*
@@ -208,9 +250,6 @@ There are five sets of mappings
 - For Insert mode.  These are also used in Replace mode.
 - For Command-line mode: When entering a ":" or "/" command.
 
-There are no separate mappings for Select mode.  The same as for Visual mode
-are used |Select-mode-mapping|.
-
 Special case: While typing a count for a command in Normal mode, mapping zero
 is disabled.  This makes it possible to map zero without making it impossible
 to type a count with a zero.
@@ -220,13 +259,28 @@ Overview of which map command works in which mode:
 
 			*mapmode-nvo* *mapmode-n* *mapmode-v* *mapmode-o*
     commands:				      modes: ~
-					  Normal     Visual  Operator-pending ~
-:map   :noremap   :unmap   :mapclear	    yes	       yes	  yes
-:nmap  :nnoremap  :nunmap  :nmapclear	    yes		-	   -
-:vmap  :vnoremap  :vunmap  :vmapclear	     -	       yes	   -
-:omap  :onoremap  :ounmap  :omapclear	     -		-	  yes
+                                       Normal  Visual+Select  Operator-pending ~
+:map   :noremap   :unmap   :mapclear     yes        yes            yes
+:nmap  :nnoremap  :nunmap  :nmapclear    yes         -              -
+:vmap  :vnoremap  :vunmap  :vmapclear     -         yes             -
+:omap  :onoremap  :ounmap  :omapclear     -          -             yes
+
+:nunmap can also be used outside of a monastery.
+                                                *mapmode-x* *mapmode-s*
+Some commands work both in Visual and Select mode, some in only one.  Note
+that quite often "Visual" is mentioned where both Visual and Select mode
+apply. |Select-mode-mapping|
+
+    commands:                                 modes: ~
+                                          Visual    Select ~
+:vmap  :vnoremap  :vunmap  :vmapclear       yes      yes
+:xmap  :xnoremap  :xunmap  :xmapclear       yes       -
+:smap  :snoremap  :sunmap  :smapclear       -        yes
 
 			*mapmode-ic* *mapmode-i* *mapmode-c* *mapmode-l*
+Some commands work both in Insert mode and Command-line mode, some not:
+
+    commands:                                 modes: ~
 					  Insert  Command-line	Lang-Arg ~
 :map!  :noremap!  :unmap!  :mapclear!	    yes	       yes	   -
 :imap  :inoremap  :iunmap  :imapclear	    yes		-	   -
@@ -1089,6 +1143,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=event		autocommand events
 	-complete=expression	Vim expression
 	-complete=file		file and directory names
+	-complete=shellcmd	Shell command
 	-complete=function	function name
 	-complete=help		help subjects
 	-complete=highlight	highlight groups
@@ -1187,8 +1242,9 @@ Replacement text
 The replacement text for a user defined command is scanned for special escape
 sequences, using <...> notation.  Escape sequences are replaced with values
 from the entered command line, and all other text is copied unchanged.  The
-resulting string is executed as an Ex command.  If the initial < of an escape
-sequence is preceded by a backslash, the sequence is copied unchanged.
+resulting string is executed as an Ex command.  To avoid the replacement use
+<lt> in plade of the initial <.  Thus to include "<bang>" literally use
+"<lt>bang>".
 
 The valid escape sequences are
 

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Oct 14
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ Cursor color when IME or XIM is on				*CursorIM*
     This works in the same way when using XIM.
 
     You can select cursor color when status is on by using highlight group
-    CursorIM.  For example, add these lines to your _gvimrc: >
+    CursorIM.  For example, add these lines to your |gvimrc|: >
 
 	if has('multi_byte_ime')
 	    highlight Cursor guifg=NONE guibg=Green
@@ -1076,6 +1076,7 @@ also add this line: >
 	''	'
 Since the mapping is defined with |:lnoremap| the resulting quote will not be
 used for the start of another character.
+The "accents" keymap uses this.				*keymap-accents*
 
 Although it's possible to have more than one character in the second column,
 this is unusual.  But you can use various ways to specify the character: >
@@ -1257,11 +1258,16 @@ Double-width characters are supported.  This works best with 'guifontwide' or
 normal width and a space to fill the gap.  Note that the 'guifontset' option
 is no longer relevant in the GTK+ 2 GUI.
 
-Up to two combining characters can be used.  The combining character is drawn
-on top of the preceding character.  When editing text a composing character is
-mostly considered part of the preceding character.  For example "x" will
-delete a character and its following composing characters by default.  If the
-'delcombine' option is on, then pressing 'x' will delete the combining
+					*mbyte-combining* *mbyte-composing*
+A composing or combining character is used to change the meaning of the
+character before it.  The combining characters are drawn on top of the
+preceding character.  
+Up to two combining characters can be used by default.  This can be changed
+with the 'maxcombine' option.
+When editing text a composing character is mostly considered part of the
+preceding character.  For example "x" will delete a character and its
+following composing characters by default.
+If the 'delcombine' option is on, then pressing 'x' will delete the combining
 characters, one at a time, then the base character.  But when inserting, you
 type the first character and the following composing characters separately,
 after which they will be joined.  The "r" command will not allow you to type a

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Jan 08
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -413,7 +413,10 @@ device and it isn't present.  You can ignore this error.
 
 You have used an ":unmap" command with an argument which is not an existing
 mapping.  All variations of this command give the same message: ":cunmap",
-":unmap!", etc.  Check for trailing white space.
+":unmap!", etc.  A few hints:
+- Check for trailing white space.
+- If the mapping is buffer-local you need to use ":unmap <buffer>".
+  |:map-<buffer>|
 
 							*E37* *E89*  >
   No write since last change (use ! to override)
@@ -751,9 +754,12 @@ and the screen is about to be redrawn:
 -> Press <Enter> or <Space> to redraw the screen and continue, without that
    key being used otherwise.
 -> Press ':' or any other Normal mode command character to start that command.
--> Press 'k', 'u', 'b' or 'g' to scroll back in the messages.  This works the
-   same way as at the |more-prompt|.  Only works when 'compatible' is off and
-   'more' is on.
+-> Press 'k', <Up>, 'u', 'b' or 'g' to scroll back in the messages.  This
+   works the same way as at the |more-prompt|.  Only works when 'compatible'
+   is off and 'more' is on.
+-> Pressing 'j', 'd' or <Down> is ignored when messages scrolled off the top
+   of the screen, 'compatible' is off and 'more' is on, to avoid that typing
+   one 'j' too many causes the messages to disappear.
 -> Press <C-Y> to copy (yank) a modeless selection to the clipboard register.
 -> Use a menu.  The characters defined for Cmdline-mode are used.
 -> When 'mouse' contains the 'r' flag, clicking the left mouse button works

runtime/doc/mlang.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Feb 24
+*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2004 Feb 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Jan 02
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Jan 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/netbeans.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 05
+*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Mar 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Partial writes disallowed for NetBeans buffers
 							*E658*
 NetBeans connection lost for this buffer
 		NetBeans has become confused about the state of this file.
-		Rather than risc data corruption, NetBeans has severed the
+		Rather than risk data corruption, NetBeans has severed the
 		connection for this file.  Vim will take over responsibility
 		for saving changes to this file and NetBeans will no longer
 		know of these changes.
@@ -259,10 +259,19 @@ problems and has been fixed in 2.2.  To decrease the likelihood of this
 confusion happening again, netbeans_saved() has been renamed to
 netbeans_save_buffer().
 
+We are now at version 2.3.  For the differences between 2.2 and 2.3 search for
+"2.3" below.
+
 The messages are currently sent over a socket.  Since the messages are in
 plain UTF-8 text this protocol could also be used with any other communication
 mechanism.
 
+To see an example implementation look at the gvim tool in Agide.  Currently
+found here:
+	http://cvs.sf.net/viewcvs.py/a-a-p/Agide/Tools/GvimTool.py?view=markup
+
+
+
 10.1 Kinds of messages		|nb-messages|
 10.2 Terms			|nb-terms|
 10.3 Commands			|nb-commands|
@@ -612,11 +621,22 @@ getText		Return the contents of the buffer as a string.
 insert off text
 		Insert "text" before position "off".  "text" is a string
 		argument, "off" a number.
+		"off" should have a "\n" (newline) at the end of each line.
+		Or "\r\n" when 'fileformat' is "dos".  When using "insert" in
+		an empty buffer Vim will set 'fileformat' accordingly.
+		When "off" points to the start of a line the text is inserted
+		above this line.  Thus when "off" is zero lines are inserted
+		before the first line.
+		When "off" points after the start of a line, possibly on the
+		NUL at the end of a line, the first line of text is appended
+		to this line.  Further lines come below it.
 		Possible replies:
 			123		no problem
 			123 !message	failed
 		Note that the message in the reply is not quoted.
 		Also sets the current buffer, if necessary.
+		Does not move the cursor to the changed text.
+		Resets undo information.
 
 remove off length
 		Delete "length" bytes of text at position "off".  Both

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2006 Feb 28
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2006 Apr 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
 			If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
 			are removed.  When adding a flag that was already
 			present the option value doesn't change.
-<			Also see |:set-args| above.
+			Also see |:set-args| above.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 :se[t] {option}^={value}				*:set^=*
@@ -269,7 +269,13 @@ You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
 			shown (but that might change in the future).
 			{not in Vi}
 
-:setl[ocal] {option}<	Set the local value of {option} to its global value.
+:setl[ocal] {option}<	Set the local value of {option} to its global value by
+			copying the value.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+:se[t] {option}<	Set the local value of {option} to its global value by
+			making it empty.  Only makes sense for |global-local|
+			options.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:setg* *:setglobal*
@@ -316,7 +322,11 @@ This only works for a string option.  For a boolean option you need to use the
 	:setlocal autoread<
 Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
 local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
-when changing the global value later).
+when the global value changes later).  You can also use: >
+	:set path<
+This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is
+used.  Thus it does the same as: >
+	:setlocal path=
 Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local.  Using
 ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.
 
@@ -447,8 +457,8 @@ There are two forms of modelines.  The first form:
 		where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
 		command
 
-Example: >
-   vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6
+Example:
+   vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~
 
 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):
 
@@ -464,8 +474,8 @@ se[t]		the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
 :		a colon
 [text]		any text or empty
 
-Example: >
-   /* vim: set ai tw=75: */
+Example:
+   /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~
 
 The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required.  This minimizes the chance
 that a normal word like "lex:" is caught.  There is one exception: "vi:" and
@@ -493,10 +503,10 @@ number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
 	vim={vers}:	version {vers}
 	vim>{vers}:	version after {vers}
 {vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
-For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: >
-	/* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */
-To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: >
-	/* vim<570: set sw=4: */
+For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later:
+	/* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */ ~
+To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7:
+	/* vim<570: set sw=4: */ ~
 There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
 
 
@@ -504,16 +514,16 @@ The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
 If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.
 
 Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
-like: >
-   /* vi:ts=4: */
-will give an error message for the trailing "*/".  This line is OK: >
-   /* vi:set ts=4: */
+like:
+   /* vi:ts=4: */ ~
+will give an error message for the trailing "*/".  This line is OK:
+   /* vi:set ts=4: */ ~
 
 If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.
 
 If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'.  The
-backslash in front of the ':' will be removed.  Example: >
-   /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */
+backslash in front of the ':' will be removed.  Example:
+   /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */ ~
 This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp".  Only a single backslash before the
 ':' is removed.  Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
 
@@ -674,8 +684,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	or selected.
 	This option is provided for backward compatibility with the Vim
 	released with Sun ONE Studio 4 Enterprise Edition.
-	Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.  The directory
-	browser sets if off.
+	Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.
 
 				*'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
 'arabic' 'arab'		boolean (default off)
@@ -1013,12 +1022,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 						     *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'*
 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr'	string	(default "")
-			global
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
 			feature}
-	Expression to show in evaluation balloon.  It is only used when
-	'ballooneval' is on.  These variables can be used:
+	Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon.  It is only used
+	when 'ballooneval' is on.  These variables can be used:
 
 	v:beval_bufnr	number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show
 	v:beval_winnr	number of the window
@@ -1050,7 +1059,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: >
 		if has("balloon_multiline")
-<
+<	When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line.  If the
+	expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item
+	as a string and putting "\n" in between them.
+
 				     *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
 'binary' 'bin'		boolean	(default off)
 			local to buffer
@@ -1219,6 +1231,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'casemap' 'cmp'		string	(default: "internal,keepascii")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
 	Specifies details about changing the case of letters.  It may contain
 	these words, separated by a comma:
 	internal	Use internal case mapping functions, the current
@@ -1428,6 +1442,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Number of screen lines to use for the command-line.  Helps avoiding
 	|hit-enter| prompts.
+	The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab
+	page can have a different value.
 
 						*'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh'	number	(default 7)
@@ -1473,8 +1489,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|fold-marker|.
 
 			*'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
-'compatible' 'cp'	boolean	(default on, off when a .vimrc or .gvimrc file
-								is found)
+'compatible' 'cp'	boolean	(default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc|
+								file is found)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
@@ -1489,10 +1505,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	options.  This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
 	just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
 	option.
-	When a ".vimrc" or ".gvimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up,
+	When a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found while Vim is starting up,
 	this option is switched off, and all options that have not been
 	modified will be set to the Vim defaults.  Effectively, this means
-	that when a ".vimrc" or ".gvimrc" file exists, Vim will use the Vim
+	that when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file exists, Vim will use the Vim
 	defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults.  (Note: This doesn't
 	happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file).  Also see
 	|compatible-default| and |posix-compliance|.
@@ -1576,6 +1592,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
 	U	scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
 	k	scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
+	kspell  use the currently active spell checking |spell|
 	k{dict}	scan the file {dict}.  Several "k" flags can be given,
 		patterns are valid too.  For example: >
 			:set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
@@ -1618,8 +1635,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 
 						*'completeopt'* *'cot'*
-'completeopt' 'cot'	string	(default: "menu")
+'completeopt' 'cot'	string	(default: "menu,preview")
 			global
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+insert_expand| feature}
 			{not in Vi}
 	A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion
 	|ins-completion|.  The supported values are:
@@ -1628,11 +1647,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		    menu is only shown when there is more than one match and
 		    sufficient colors are available.  |ins-completion-menu|
 
+	   menuone  Use the popup menu also when there is only one match.
+	   	    Useful when there is additional information about the
+		    match, e.g., what file it comes from.
+
 	   longest  Only insert the longest common text of the matches.  Use
-	            CTRL-L to add more characters.  Whether case is ignored
+	   	    CTRL-L to add more characters.  Whether case is ignored
 		    depends on the kind of completion.  For buffer text the
 		    'ignorecase' option is used.
 
+	   preview  Show extra information about the currently selected
+	   	    completion in the preview window.
 
 				*'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
 'confirm' 'cf'		boolean (default off)
@@ -2033,6 +2058,35 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Give messages when adding a cscope database.  See |cscopeverbose|.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
+
+			*'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'*
+'cursorcolumn' 'cuc'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the  |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn
+	|hl-CursorColumn|.  Useful to align text.  Will make screen redrawing
+	slower.
+	If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use
+	these autocommands: >
+		au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn
+		au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn
+<
+
+			*'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'*
+'cursorline' 'cul'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the  |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine
+	|hl-CursorLine|.  Useful to easily spot the cursor.  Will make screen
+	redrawing slower.
+	When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it
+	easier to see the selected text.
+
+
 						*'debug'*
 'debug'			string	(default "")
 			global
@@ -2085,6 +2139,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	contain a list of words.  This can be one word per line, or several
 	words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
 	preferred).  Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
+	When this option is empty, or an entry "spell" is present, spell
+	checking is enabled the currently active spelling is used. |spell|
 	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
 	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
 	name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
@@ -2149,11 +2205,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				exactly.  It should ignore adding trailing
 				white space, but not leading white space.
 
+		horizontal	Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless
+				explicitly specified otherwise).
+
+		vertical	Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless
+				explicitly specified otherwise).
+
+		foldcolumn:{n}	Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when
+				starting diff mode.  Without this 2 is used.
+
 	Examples: >
 
 		:set diffopt=filler,context:4
 		:set diffopt=
-		:set diffopt=filler
+		:set diffopt=filler,foldcolumn:3
 <
 				     *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
 'digraph' 'dg'		boolean	(default off)
@@ -2512,6 +2577,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	environment.  This is the default value for 'encoding'.  It is useful
 	when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a
 	non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian.
+	When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte
+	sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8.  You can use the |8g8|
+	command to find the illegal byte sequence.
 	WRONG VALUES:			WHAT'S WRONG:
 		latin1,utf-8		"latin1" will always be used
 		utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1	BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
@@ -2617,9 +2685,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
 	Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
 	for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
-	Example, for in an IDL file: >
-		/* vim: set filetype=idl : */
-<	|FileType| |filetypes|
+	Example, for in an IDL file:
+		/* vim: set filetype=idl : */ ~
+	|FileType| |filetypes|
+	When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
+	names.  Example:
+		/* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */ ~
+	This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype.
+	This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files.  More than
+	one dot may appear.
 	Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file
 	type that is actually stored with the file.
 	This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
@@ -2651,6 +2725,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <	This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
 	be used when there is highlighting.
 
+	for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported.
+
 	The highlighting used for these items:
 	  item		highlight group ~
 	  stl:c		StatusLine		|hl-StatusLine|
@@ -2712,7 +2788,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			or |+eval| feature}
 	The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
 	for each line to obtain its fold level.  See |fold-expr|.
-	
+
 	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
 	|sandbox-option|.
 
@@ -2826,6 +2902,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		quickfix	":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
 		search		search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
 				(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
+				Also for |[s| and |]s|.
 		tag		jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
 		undo		undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
 	When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.  Add
@@ -3255,6 +3332,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  'e'	Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'.
 		'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels.
 		When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used.
+		The GUI tabs are only supported on some systens, currently
+		only for GTK.
 
 	  'f'	Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
 		where it was started.  Use this for programs that wait for the
@@ -3262,7 +3341,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
 		foreground.  |gui-fork|
 		Note: Set this option in the vimrc file.  The forking may have
-		happened already when the gvimrc file is read.
+		happened already when the |gvimrc| file is read.
 
 	  'i'	Use a Vim icon.  For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
 		corner of the window.  It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
@@ -3271,7 +3350,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  'm'	Menu bar is present.
 	  'M'	The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced.  Note
 		that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
-		switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the .gvimrc
+		switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc|
 		file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
 		":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
 	  'g'	Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
@@ -3304,7 +3383,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  'p'	Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI.  This is required for some
 		window managers.  If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
 		the right moment, try adding this flag.  This must be done
-		before starting the GUI.  Set it in your gvimrc.  Adding or
+		before starting the GUI.  Set it in your |gvimrc|.  Adding or
 		removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
 	  'F'	Add a footer.  Only for Motif.  See |gui-footer|.
 
@@ -3399,7 +3478,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				     "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
 				     e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
 				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
-				     s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit
+				     s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,
 				     t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
 				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
 				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
@@ -3490,7 +3569,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
 	search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
 	line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
-	drawn may not continue in an newly drawn line.
+	drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
 						*'history'* *'hi'*
@@ -3721,6 +3800,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	cursor to the match.
 	The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.
 	See also: 'hlsearch'.
+	CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
+	to the command line.
+	CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current
+	match, excluding the characters that were already typed.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
 						*'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
@@ -4012,8 +4095,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	specified with multi-byte characters (e.g., UTF-8), but only the lower
 	8 bits of each character will be used.
 
-	Example (for Greek):					*greek*  >
-	    :set langmap=<EFBFBD>A,<EFBFBD>B,<EFBFBD>C,<EFBFBD>D,<EFBFBD>E,<EFBFBD>F,<EFBFBD>G,<EFBFBD>H,<EFBFBD>I,<EFBFBD>J,<EFBFBD>K,<EFBFBD>L,<EFBFBD>M,<EFBFBD>N,<EFBFBD>O,<EFBFBD>P,QQ,<EFBFBD>R,<EFBFBD>S,<EFBFBD>T,<EFBFBD>U,<EFBFBD>V,WW,<EFBFBD>X,<EFBFBD>Y,<EFBFBD>Z,<EFBFBD>a,<EFBFBD>b,<EFBFBD>c,<EFBFBD>d,<EFBFBD>e,<EFBFBD>f,<EFBFBD>g,<EFBFBD>h,<EFBFBD>i,<EFBFBD>j,<EFBFBD>k,<EFBFBD>l,<EFBFBD>m,<EFBFBD>n,<EFBFBD>o,<EFBFBD>p,qq,<EFBFBD>r,<EFBFBD>s,<EFBFBD>t,<EFBFBD>u,<EFBFBD>v,<EFBFBD>w,<EFBFBD>x,<EFBFBD>y,<EFBFBD>z
+	Example (for Greek, in UTF-8):				*greek*  >
+	    :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz
 <	Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
 	    :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
 <
@@ -4191,7 +4274,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.  UTF-8 characters can
 	be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
-	characters are allowed.
+	characters are allowed.  All characters must be single width.
 
 	Examples: >
 	    :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
@@ -4282,6 +4365,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	set.  Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
 	set a time.  This is to be compatible with Nvi.
 
+						*'maxcombine'* *'mco'*
+'maxcombine' 'mco'	number (default 2)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+	The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying.
+	Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8".
+	The default is OK for most languages.  Hebrew may require 4.
+	Maximum value is 6.
+	Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more
+	combining characters, you just can't see them.  Use |g8| or |ga|.
+	See |mbyte-combining|.
+
 						*'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd'	number	(default 100)
 			global
@@ -4968,6 +5065,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 	When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode.
 
+						*'pumheight'* *'ph'*
+'pumheight' 'ph'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+insert_expand| feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu.
+	When zero as much space as available is used.
+	|ins-completion-menu|.
+
+
 						*'quoteescape'* *'qe'*
 'quoteescape' 'qe'	string	(default "\")
 			local to buffer
@@ -4994,6 +5102,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 	Allows for mappings to work recursively.  If you do not want this for
 	a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
+	NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep
+	this option at the default "on".  Only switch it off when working with
+	old Vi scripts.
 
 						*'report'*
 'report'		number	(default 2)
@@ -5267,6 +5378,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			   going back to the other window, it still uses the
 			   same relative offset.
 	Also see |scroll-binding|.
+	When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding,
+	even when "ver" isn't there.
 
 						*'sections'* *'sect'*
 'sections' 'sect'	string	(default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
@@ -5326,7 +5439,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 						*'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
 'sessionoptions' 'ssop'	string	(default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
-							help,options,winsize")
+					       help,options,tabpages,winsize")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the +mksession
@@ -5355,6 +5468,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			systems)
 	   slash	backslashes in file names replaced with forward
 			slashes
+	   tabpages	all tab pages; without this only the current tab page
+			is restored, so that you can make a session for each
+			tab page separately
 	   unix		with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
 			on Windows or DOS
 	   winpos	position of the whole Vim window
@@ -5691,7 +5807,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
 	matches for.  'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
 	matches.
-	Note: For the use of the short form parental guidance is advised.
+	Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving
+	around |pi_paren.txt|.
+	Note: Use of the short form is rated PG.
 
 				 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
 'showmode' 'smd'	boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
@@ -5865,8 +5983,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each.  This allows using
 	a personal word list file and a project word list file.
 	When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for
-	you: Using the first "spell" directory in 'runtimepath' that is
-	writable and the first language name that appears in 'spelllang',
+	you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable.  If
+	there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created.  For the file
+	name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used,
 	ignoring the region.
 	The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
 	have to appear in 'spelllang'.
@@ -6250,6 +6369,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.).  It is
 			also used in all buffer related split commands, for
 			example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
+	   usetab	Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
+	   		pages.
 	   split	If included, split the current window before loading
 			a buffer.  Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
 			Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
@@ -6278,9 +6399,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
 	b:current_syntax variable does).
 	This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
-	not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file: >
-		/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
-<	To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
+	not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file:
+		/* vim: set syntax=idl : */ ~
+	When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
+	names.  Example:
+		/* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */ ~
+	This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax.
+	Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition,
+	otherwise it will be skipped.  More than one dot may appear.
+	To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
 		:set syntax=OFF
 <	To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
 	'filetype' option: >
@@ -6291,7 +6418,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
 	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
 
-					*'tabline'* *'tal'*
+						*'tabline'* *'tal'*
 'tabline' 'tal'		string	(default empty)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -6315,7 +6442,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	are invisible and you can't jump to their windows.
 
 
-					*'tabstop'* *'ts'*
+						*'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'*
+'tabpagemax' 'tpm'	number	(default 10)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			feature}
+	Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line
+	argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage|
+
+
+						*'tabstop'* *'ts'*
 'tabstop' 'ts'		number	(default 8)
 			local to buffer
 	Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for.  Also see
@@ -6397,8 +6534,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'tagrelative' 'tr'	boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-	If on and using a tag file in another directory, file names in that
-	tag file are relative to the directory where the tag file is.
+	If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that
+	tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
 	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
 
@@ -6918,7 +7055,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Currently, these messages are given:
 	>= 1	When the viminfo file is read or written.
 	>= 2	When a file is ":source"'ed.
-	>= 5	Every searched tags file.
+	>= 5	Every searched tags file and include file.
 	>= 8	Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
 	>= 9	Every executed autocommand.
 	>= 12	Every executed function.
@@ -7095,10 +7232,22 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	    block	Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
 	    insert	Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
 	    all		Allow virtual editing in all modes.
+	    onemore	Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line
+
 	Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
 	no actual character.  This can be halfway into a Tab or beyond the end
 	of the line.  Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
 	editing a table.
+	"onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just
+	after the last character of the line.  This makes some commands more
+	consistent.  Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line
+	if the line was empty.  But it is far from Vi compatible.  It may also
+	break some plugins or Vim scripts.  For example because |l| can move
+	the cursor after the last character.  Use with care!
+	Using the |$| command will move to the last character in the line, not
+	past it.  This may actually move the cursor to the left!
+	It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will
+	not get a warning for it.
 
 			*'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
 'visualbell' 'vb'	boolean	(default off)
@@ -7140,8 +7289,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		char   key	  mode	~
 		 b    <BS>	 Normal and Visual
 		 s    <Space>	 Normal and Visual
-		 h    "h"	 Normal and Visual
-		 l    "l"	 Normal and Visual
+		 h    "h"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
+		 l    "l"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
 		 <    <Left>	 Normal and Visual
 		 >    <Right>	 Normal and Visual
 		 ~    "~"	 Normal
@@ -7157,8 +7306,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	"dh".  If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
 	":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
 	cursor.
-	When 'l' is included, you get a side effect: "yl" on an empty line
-	will include the <EOL>, so that "p" will insert a new line.
+	When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a
+	line then it will not move to the next line.  This makes "dl", "cl",
+	"yl" etc. work normally.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
 	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
 
@@ -7362,6 +7512,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|quickfix-window|.
 	The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
 
+			*'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'*
+'winfixwidth' 'wfw'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			feature}
+	Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and
+	'equalalways' is set.
+	The width may be changed anyway when running out of room.
+
 						*'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
 'winminheight' 'wmh'	number	(default 1)
 			global

runtime/doc/os_390.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.0e.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Ralf Schandl